OROGRAPHY 


ASIATIC  YJEW 


BY  WILLIAM  WARREN 

r-  R ! S C 1 P A l. 


OF  TX  1 .N  D H A M .'-t  l 'i  1l  SOtfOOJ. 


vnvrvT 


PORTLX.  i-..  MEm 
HYDK,  LORD  &•  DTJREN 

, f ALSO  FOR  SA/JR  BY  . ' £ 

^OOoS,  5T.  LOriS,~nF m PERKI^S/PHILADELPHI  A , 
t CO., .NEW  YOR£..-GOUL!i.  KEN.DAUU  S LINCOLN,  BOSTON. 
WM.  H.  MOORE  L CO.,  CINCINNAT  t,  OfPO. 

ANO,  THE  BOOKLET ,TJEHS  GENERALLY 


MARTIN  ROWAN  CHAFFIN 
COLLECTION 

OF 

PUBLIC  SCHOOL  TEXT-BOOKS 


PRESENTED  TO 

Duke  University 
Library 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/systematicviewof01warr 


A 


SYSTEMATIC  VIEW 


OF 

G E 0 Gr  R A P H Y, 


WITH  SPECIAL  REFERENCE  TO 

ARRANGEMENT,  CLASSIFICATION,  CONCISENESS, 
ASSOCIATION,  AND  REVIEWS; 

CONTAINED  IN  THREE  PARTS; 

INCLUDING  A 

GENERAL,  PARTICULAR,  AND  MISCELLANEOUS 

VIEW  OE  THE  WOULD. 


B V 

WILLIAM  WARREN, 

PRINCIPAL  OF  THE  WINDHAM  HIGH  SCHOOL 

TENTH  EDITION. 


PORTLAND: 

HYDE,  LORD  & I.)U  R E N . 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  A.  D.  1842, 

By  E.  F.  Dureh, 

In  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States 
for  the  District  of  Maine. 


STEREOTYPED  AT  THE 
BOSTON  TYPE  AND  STEREOTYPE  FOUNDRY. 


Thurston,  & Co., 


Printers,  Portland  Me. 


''A  p 


Hi  o' 

W ,:U>  ' I 4*6 

Chaffin  Collection 

INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


A school  book,  to  gain  the  confidence  of  the  public,  must 
not  only  possess  excellences,  but  such  as  no  other  work  of  the 
kind  possesses.  Our  country  is  already  flooded  with  school  books, 
and  greatly  to  the  perplexity  of  committees,  teachers,  and  schol- 
ars. Therefore  each  new  book  ought  to  diminish,  rather  than 
increase,  the  number  of  the  kind  already  in  use. 

The  design  of  this  work  is  to  spread  before  the  minds  of  the 
young,  in  as  condensed  and  simple  a manner  as  possible,  the  gen- 
eral outlines  of  the  earth,  and  the  particular  points  of  interest  per- 
taining to  each  country.  A comprehensive  view,  or  kind  of  pan- 
orama of  the  earth  in  its  natural  form  of  continents,  oceans,  islands, 
mountains,  seas,  gulfs,  rivers,  & c.,  is  first  presented  to  the  eye, 
and  then  a particular  view  of  the  prominent  features  of  each 
country  and  state,  — upon  the  following  plan:  — 

(1.)  We  have  selected  the  most  important  points  of  interest  be- 
longing to  each  country,  and  treated  of  those  points  exclusively 
in  each  case,  and  in  order.  They  embrace  the  physical , civil,  and 
moral  aspects  of  the  country.  The  points  selected  are  these:  — 
L-  Boundaries.  2.  Rivers  and  other  Waters.  3.  Mountains  or 
Deserts.  4.  Productions.  5.  Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  6.  Gov- 
ernment. 7.  Religion.  8.  State  of  Education  and  Morals.  9.  Re- 
marks — touching  the  peculiarities  of  the  country. 

(2.)  We  have  aimed  at  brevity,  and  yet  explicitness  of  defini- 
tion and  perspicuity  of  expression  throughout 

(3.)  We  have  made  use,  when  we  could,  of  the  law  of  associa- 
tion, to  aid  the  memory  and  abbreviate  the  labor  of  the  pupil. 

(4.)  We  have  observed  order  and  system  in  reference  to  the 
questions. 

(5.)  We  have  introduced  a system  of  reviewing,  by  which  the 
pupil  is  enabled  to  retain  what  he  has  learned. 

(6.)  We  have  annexed  to  each  lesson  miscellaneous  remarks 
and  questions,  to  be  attended  to  by  those  who  go  through  the 
work  a second  time. 


4 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


We  are  aware  that  authors  differ  as  to  what  appropriately  be- 
longs to  the  study  of  geography.  They  differ  still  more  in 
respect  to  the  best  method  of  communicating  the  knowledge  per- 
taining to  this  science.  To  confine  ourselves  to  what  is  merely 
physical , or  pure  geography,  would  be  to  present  a very  meagre 
view  of  the  subject.  And  to  consign  the  civil  and  moral  features 
of  the  different  countries  to  tables  or  columns  of  statistics,  is  to 
shut  out  from  the  regular  course  of  study  a great  amount  of  use- 
ful information.  And  yet  there  is  danger  of  throwing  together 
such  a confused  mass  of  facts,  as  to  render  the  study  wearisome 
and  perplexing.  We  have  endeavored  to  strike  a medium  be- 
tween these  two  extremes. 

And  as  to  the  best  way  of  communicating  the  facts  properly 
belonging  to  this  science,  we  remark  that  in  this,  as  in  every 
subject,  general  principles  and  truths  should  first  be  presented, 
and  then  the  more  particular  and  minute.  To  begin  the  study  of 
geography  with  a particular  country,  river,  or  rill,  and  close  it 
with  a general  view  of  the  earth,  seems  like  commencing  the 
study  of  grammar  with  a case  or  tense,  and  closing  it  with  the 
noun  or  verb ; or  like  commencing  the  study  of  chemistry  with 
the  atomic  theory,  and  closing  it  with  a general  discussion  of 
the  elements.  There  is  nothing  like  it  in  fact,  but  the  blowing 
of  a trumpet,  for  which  this  theory  seems  to  have  been  started. 

Upon  the  present  plan,  we  have  the  advantage  of  simplicity, 
order,  association,  and  system  in  questioning  and  reviewing. 

The  subject  of  geography  is  often  so  presented,  that  the  pupil, 
when  he  has  been  through  it,  feels  like  one  that  has  been  through 
a wilderness.  He  has  seen  a great  many  objects,  but  all  is  con- 
fusion and  darkness  behind.  But  it  may  be  presented  so  that 
the  scholar,  when  he  has  been  through  it,  will  feel  that  he  has 
been  through  a park!  He  can  see  back  the  whole  distance, 
and  review  distinctly  all  the  objects  he  has  passed.  Said  an  indi- 
vidual who  had  been  through  this  study  upon  an  improved  plan, 
“My  knowledge  of  geography  was  once  like  the  straws  in  a 
stack  of  hay  — confusion;  it  is  now  like  the  straws  in  a shock  of 
rye.”  The  illustration,  though  not  in  very  good  taste,  meets  the 
point  precisely. 

This  system  had  been  put  to  the  test  of  several  years’  expe- 
rience, by  the  author  and  others,  before  its  publication ; and  it 
has  been  found  to  awaken  an  interest  in  the  study  altogether 
unusual.  The  amount  of  geographical  knowledge  is  increased,  the 
memory  strengthened,  and  general  mental  discipline  promoted,  by 
the  plan  here  presented.  It  is  hoped  that  this  work  will  facilitate 
the  acquisition  of  a branch  of  knowledge  that  has  hitherto  been 
difficult  to  acquire,  and  still  more  difficult  -to  retain.  The  third 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


5 


part,  or  Miscellaneous  View,  embraces  a brief  historical  sketch  of 
the  different  countries  and  states,  and  also  a glance  at  the  dif- 
ferent missionary  stations,  with  questions.  The  study  can  be 
extended  to  these  subjects,  if  it  is  desired. 

The  Author  acknowledges  the  aid  derived  from  other  authors 
in  the  compilation  of  this  work  — especially  from  Goodrich  and 
Balbi. 


SECOND  EDITION. 


The  first  edition  of  this  work  was  thrown  out  hastily,  as  an  ex- 
periment, to  test  the  general  plan,  and  elicit  information  and 
criticism.  The  present  edition  is  thoroughly  revised  and  rewrit- 
ten ; and  a more  accurate  definition  is  given  of  each  country,  and 
a different  method  of  association,  in  some  respects,  assumed. 


This  edition  is  accompanied  with  an  Atlas,  adapted  to  the  plan. 
We  have  taken  a medium  between  the  scantiness  of  Field’s  Atlas 
and  the  fulness  of  Smith’s  and  Olney’s.  It  will  be  noticed  that, 
in  the  Atlas  accompanying  this  work,  the  length  of  rivers,  length 
and  height  of  mountains,  and  the  dimensions  of  bodies  of  water, 
are  generally  given.  Moreover,  the  missionary  stations  of  the 
different  religious  denominations  are  referred  to  by  a symbol. 
The  form  of  government  in  each  country  is  indicated  by  the  char- 
acter standing  for  its  capital,  and  the  religion  by  the  coloring 
upon  the  border  of  the  country. 

W.  W. 


Windham,  April  20,  1843. 


I* 


DIRECTIONS. 


In  giving  the  boundaries  of  countries,  I have  given  only  a 
plan,  or  skeleton,  to  guide  the  scholar,  while  he  is  to  refer  to  the 
maps  for  the  particular  facts.  The  scholar  should  be  questioned 
in  reference  to  the  climate  of  each  country,  to  be  inferred  from  its 
latitude  and  its  proximity  to  bodies  of  water,  and  to  deserts  or 
mountains. 

For  young  classes,  these  lessons  will  be  found  too  long. 
When  this  is  the  case,  they  may  be  conveniently  divided.  And 
when  there  are  members  in  the  class  that  cannot  advance  as  fast 
as  the  rest  of  the  class,  a part  of  the  questions  in  each  lesson  may 
be  conveniently  omitted,  as  the  questions  in  each  lesson  are 
nearly  similar. 

Teachers  will  explain  the  meaning  of  words  which  the  pupils 
may  not  understand,  and  ask  additional  questions  when  they  think 
proper. 

If  the  teacher  should  prefer  not  to  connect  the  civil  and  moral 
aspects  of  countries  with  the  physical  and  topical,  he  may  omit,  in 
all  cases,  the  three  last  questions  pertaining  to  each  country. 

The  Second  Course  — not  to  be  attended  to  the  first  time 
going  through  the  work  — contains  a very  minute  and  extensive 
view  of  the  subject,  and  must  be  made  familiar,  before  the  study 
is  completed. 


GEOGRAPHY 


PART  I. 

GENERAL  VIEW  OF  THE  EARTH. 


jESSON  s. 

Geography  is  a description  of  the  earth  and  its  inhabitants. 
The  form  of  the  earth  is  round,  like  a ball  or  globe. 


The  Axis  of  the  earth  is  an  imaginary  line  passing 
through  its  centre,  from  north  to  south,  around  which  it 
turns. 


8 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


The  earth  turns  around  its  axis  once  in  24  hours.  This 
motion  is  called  its  diurnal  or  daily  revolution.  It  is  this 
that  gives  us  day  and  night,  sunrise,  noonday,  and  sunset. 

The  Poles  are  the  ends  of  the  axis. 

The  Equator  is  an  imaginary  circle,  passing  around  the 
earth  from  east  to  west,  at  an  equal  distance  from  the 
poles. 


The  Tropics  are  two  circles,  parallel  with  the  equator, 
and  distant  from  it  nearly  23J  degrees.  That  north  of 
the  equator  is  the  Tropic  of  Cancer ; that  south  of  it,  the 
Tropic  of  Capricorn. 

The  Polar  Circles  are  parallel  with  the  tropics,  and  are 
at  the  same  distance  from  the  poles  that  the  tropics  are 
from  the  equator. 

The  circle  around  the  north  pole  is  the  Arctic  Circle ; 
that  around  the  south  pole  is  the  Antarctic  Circle. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  ia  geography  ? 2.  What  is  the  form 

of  the  earth  ? 3.  What  is  the  axis  of  the  earth?  4.  How  often  does 
the  earth  turn  round  its  axis  ? 5.  What  is  this  motion  called  ? 

6.  What  does  it  give  us  ? 7.  What  are  the  poles  ? .8.  What  is  the 
equator?  9.  What  are  the  tropics?  10.  Name  them.  11.  Where 
are  the  polar  circles  ? 12.  How  far  are  they  from  the  poles  ? 

13.  Which  is  the  arctic  circle  ? 14.  Which  is  the  antarctic  circle  ? 


CIRCLES. 


DEFINITIONS. 


9 


LESSON  II. 

The  earth  belongs  to  a system  of  planets,  or  worlds,  that 
revolve  around  the  sun.  The  earth  revolves  around  the 
sun  once  in  365J  days.  This  motion  is  called  its  annual 
or  yearly  revolution.  It  is  this  that  gives  us  winter  and 
summer,  spring  and  autumn,  seed-time  and  harvest. 

The  Sun  is  a vast  luminous  body,  situated  iu  the  centre 
of  the  solar  system.  It  is  the  source  of  light,  heat,  and 
attraction  to  all  the  planets. 

The  earth  is  ninety-six  million  miles  from  the  sun. 

The  greatest  distance  through  a globe,  or  a straight  line 
through  its  centre,  is  called  its  diameter ; the  greatest  dis- 
tance round  a globe  is  called  its  circumference. 

The  diameter  of  the  earth  is  eight  thousand  miles.  Its 
circumference  is  nearly  twenty-five  thousand  miles. 

The  sun  is  more  than  a million  times  larger  than  our 
earth. 

The  parts  of  the  earth  are  usually  represented  on  flat 
surfaces,  called  maps. 

In  studying  a map,  the  part  towards  you  is  south,’  the 
part  from  you  is  north,  the  part  at  the  right  hand  is  east, 
the  part  at  the  left  hand  is  west. 


The  Lines  of  Latitude,  are  circles  round  the  earth,  paral- 
lel with  the  equator  and  the  tropics. 


10 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


PARALLELS. 


The  Meridian  Lines  are  circles  round  the  earth,  crossing 
the  equator  at  right  angles,  and  crossing  each  other  at  the 
poles. 

MERIDIANS. 


Latitude  is  distance  reckoned  north  and  south,  from  the 
equator. 

Longitude  is  distance  reckoned  east  and  west,  from  some 
fixed  meridian.  The  principal  one  is  Greenwich,  in 
England. 

All  circles  are  divided  into  360  equal  parts,  called 

degrees. 

Degrees  are  divided  into  60  equal  parts,  called  minutes. 
Minutes  are  also  divided  into  60  equal  parts,  called 
seconds. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  To  what  does  the  earth  belong  ? 2.  How  often 
does  the  earth  revolve  around  the  sun  ? 3.  What  does  this  give  us? 

4 What  is  the  sun?  5.  Of  what  is  it  the  source?  6.  How  far  is 


HEMISPHERES  AND  ZONES. 


11 


the  earth  from  the  sun  ? 7.  What  is  diameter  ? 8.  What  is  circum- 
ference ? 9.  What  is  the  diameter  of  the  earth?  10.  What  is  its  cir- 
cumference ? 11.  How  much  larger  is  the  sun  than  the  earth  ? 12. 

How  are  the  parts  of  the  earth  usually  represented  ? (Open  to  the 
Map  of  the  World.)  13.  The  part  of  the  map  towards  you  is  what  ? 
14.  The  part  from  you  is  what  ? 15.  The  part  at  the  right  hand  ? 
16.  The  part  at  the  left  ? 17.  What  are  lines  of  latitude  ? 
18.  What  are  meridian  lines  ? 19.  What  is  latitude  ? 20.  What  is 
longitude  ? 21.  How  are  all  circles  divided  ? 22.  How  are  degrees 
divided  ? 23.  How  are  minutes  divided  ? 

Review  Lesson  I. 

(The  teacher  will  explain  to  the  pupil  the  meaning  of  the  terms 
unexplained  in  the  lessons.  He  will  require  the  scholar  to  point 
out  upon  the  map,  the  equator,  poles,  and  the  different  circles, 
lines,  &c.) 


.V 


J\ 


LESSON  III. 


HEMISPHERES  AND  ZONES. 

HEMISPHERES. 

A Hemisphere  is  half  of  the  globe.  The  half  of  the  earth 
north  of  the  equator  is  called  the  Northern  Hemisphere. 

The  half  of  the  earth  south  of  the  equator  is  called  the 
Southern  Hemisphere. 

The  half  of  the  earth  including  Europe,  Asia,  Africa,  and 
Australia,  nearly  in  a circle,  is  called  the  Eastern 
Hemisphere. 

The  half  including  North  and  South  America,  in  the 
same  manner,  the  Western  Hemisphere. 

ZONES. 

Zones  are  imaginary  belts,  surrounding  the  earth.  There 
are  five  — the  Torrid,  two  Temperate,  and  two  Frio-id 
Zones. 

The  Torrid  Zone  may  be  styled  the  red  belt,  because  it 
encircles  the  hottest  parts  of  the  earth. 


12 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


The  Temperate  Zones  may  be  styled  green  belts,  because 
they  encircle  the  more  fertile  parts. 

The  Frigid  Zones  may  be  styled  white  belts,  or  caps, 
because  they  cover  the  extreme  ends  of  the  earth,  whitened 
by  snow. 

The  Torrid  Zone  encircles  the  centre  of  the  earth,  and 
extends  each  way  from  the  equator  to  the  tropics. 

The  Temperate  Zones  lie  between  the  tropics  and  the 
polar  circles. 

The  Frigid  Zones  extend  from  the  polar  circles  to  the 
poles. 

The  zones  may  be  bounded  by  the  sun,  as  follows:  — 

The  Torrid  Zone  encircles  those  parts  of  the  earth 
where  the  sun  is  sometimes  in  the  year  vertical,  or  directly 
overhead. 

The  Temperate  Zones  encircle  those  parts  of  the  earth 
where  the  sun  is  never  vertical,  and  never  hidden. 

The  Frigid  Zones  cover  those  parts  of  the  earth  where 
the  sun,  for  a season,  is  hidden,  that  is,  not  seen,  during  the 
24  hours. 


QUESTIONS.  3.  What  is  a hemisphere  ? 2.  Which  is  the  north- 
ern hemisphere  ? 3.  Which  is  the  southern  hemisphere  ? 4.  What 

portion  of  the  earth  is  called  the  eastern  hemisphere  ? 5.  What 

is  called  the  western  hemisphere  ? 6.  What  are  zones  ? 7.  Name 

them.  8.  What  may  the  torrid  zone  be  styled?  9.  Why?  10. 
What  may  the  temperate  zones  be  styled?  11.  Why?  32.  What 
may  the  frigid  zones  be  styled?  13.  Why?  14.  Where  is  the  torrid 
zone?  15.  Where  the  temperate  zones?  16.  Where  the  frigid  zones? 
17.  How  else  may  the  zones  be  bounded  ? 18.  What  part  of  the 

arth  does  the  torrid  zone  encircle  ? 19.  The  two  temperate  zones  ? 

20.  What  parts  do  the  two  frigid  zones  cover  ? 


CONTINENTS. 


13 


Review  the  preceding  lessons. 

(The  teacher  will  explain  the  words  temperate , torrid , frigid , 
fertile,  &c.  &c.,  and  do  the  same  in  each  lesson.  He  will  ask  also 
additional  questions,  as  his  judgment  may  dictate.) 


LESSON  IV. 

CONTINENTS. 

Continents  are  the  largest  surfaces  of  land  on  the  globe. 
There  are  six — Europe,  Asia,  Africa,  North  America, 
South  America,  and  Australia.  (Map  of  the  World.) 

Europe,  mostly  in  one  zone,  is  situated  between  the  A. 
Ocean  on  the  north  and  the  M.  Sea  on  the  south,  arid 
between  A.  on  the  east  and  the  A.  Ocean  on  the  west. 

Asia,  principally  in  one  zone,  is  situated  between  the 
A.  Ocean  on  the  north  and  the  1.  Ocean  on  the  south, 
and  between  the  P.  Ocean  on  the  east  and  E.  on  the  west. 

Africa  lies  mostly  in  one  zone.  It  is  situated  between 
the  M.  Sea  on  the  north  and  the  S.  Ocean  on  the  south, 
and  between  the  I.  Ocean  and  R.  Sea  on  the  east  and  the 
A.  Ocean  on  the  west. 

North  America,  mostly  in  one  zone,  is  situated  between 
the  A.  Ocean  on  the  north  and  the  Gulf  of  M.  on  the 
south,  and  between  the  A.  Ocean  on  the  east  and  the 
P.  Ocean  on  the  west. 

South  America  lies  in  two  zones.  It  is  situated  between 
the  C.  Sea  on  the  north  and  the  S.  Ocean  on  the  south, 
and  between  the  A.  Ocean  on  the  east  and  the  P.  Ocean 
on  the  west. 

Australia,  lies  also  in  two  zones.  It  is  situated  be- 
tween the  Archipelago,  separating  the  I.  and  the  P.  Oceans, 
on  the  north,  and  the  S.  Ocean  on  the  south,  and  between 
the  P.  Ocean  on  the  east  and  the  I.  Ocean  on  the  west. 

The  edge  of  land  bordering  on  the  water  is  called  a 
coast  or  shore. 


2 


14 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


A point  of  land  extending  into  a sea,  or  ocean,  if  level, 
is  called  a cape;  if  elevated,  a promontory . 

QUESTIONS,  t.  What  are  continents  ? 2.  Name  the  continents 
on  the  globe.  3.  In  what  zone  and  hemispheres  is  Europe  ? 4.  How 
is  it  situated  ? 5.  Ln  what  zone  and  hemispheres  is  Asia  ? 6.  How 

situated  ? 7.  In  what  zones  and  hemispheres  is  Africa  ? 8.  How  is  it 

situated  ? 9.  In  what  zone  and  hemispheres  is  North  America  ? 

10.  How  situated  ? 11.  In  what  zones  and  hemispheres  does  South 

America  lie  ? 12.  How  is  it  situated  ? 13.  In  what  zones  and  hem- 

ispheres is  Australia?  14.  How  situated  ? 15.  What  is  a coast  ? 
16.  What  are  points  of  land  extending  into  the  ocean,  when  level, 
called  ? 17.  What  are  they  called  when  elevated  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  V . 

(The  pupil,  in  these  lessons,  must  rely  principally  on  the  maps.) 

OCEANS. 

Oceans  are  the  largest  surfaces  of  water  on  the  globe. 

There  are  five  — the  Pacific,  Atlantic,  Southern,  In- 
dian, and  Arctic  Oceans.  (Map  of  the  World.) 

The  Pacific  Ocean  lies  in  three  zones,  extending  from 
Behring’s  Strait  on  the  north  to  the  S.  Ocean  on  the  south, 
and  from  A.  on  the  east  to  A.  and  Aust.  on  the  west. 

The  Atlantic  Ocean  lies  also  in  three  zones.  It  ex- 
tends from  the  A.  Ocean  on  the  north  to  the  S.  Ocean 
on  the  south,  and  from  E.  and  A.  on  the  east  to  N.  and 
S.  A.  on  the  west. 

The  Southern  Ocean  lies  in  two  zones.  If  has  only  a 
northern  boundary  — the  Pacific,  Atlantic,  and  Indian 
Oceans,  and  the  continents  of  S.  America,  Africa,  and  Aus- 
tralia. 

The  Indian  Ocean  lies  mostly  in  one  zone  — between  A. 


ISLANDS,  PENINSULAS,  &C. 


15 


on  the  north  and  the  S.  Ocean  on  the  south,  and  between 
Aust.  on  the  east  and  A.  on  the  west. 

The  Arctic  Ocean  lies  wholly  in  one  zone.  It  has  only 
a southern  boundary,  which  is  Europe,  Asia,  N.  America, 
and  the  A.  Ocean. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  an  ocean?  2.  Name  the  oceans  on 
the  globe.  3.  Where  is  the  Pacific  Ocean  situated  ? (Mention  the 
zones  in  which  it  lies,  and  give  its  boundaries ; or  tell  what  lies  north, 
east,  south,  and  west  of  it.)  4.  Where  is  the  Atlantic  Ocean  situ- 
ated ? 5.  Where  is  the  Southern  Ocean  situated  ? 6.  Where  is  the 
Indian  Ocean  situated  ? 7.  Where  is  the  Arctic  Ocean  situated  ? 

(Mention  its  zone  and  the  countries  and  oceans  that  lie  south  of  it.) 

(The  teacher  will  question  the  scholars  in  reference  to  the  climate 
of  the  oceans,  continents,  seas,  &c.,  to  be  inferred  from  their  latitude, 
or  situation  in  respect  to  mountains  or  deserts.  He  will  also  question 
them,  in  all  cases,  in  respect  to  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  bodies  of 
water  and  countries ; not  as  to  the  precise  degrees,  but  their  general 
latitude  and  longitude.) 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  VI. 

ISLANDS,  PENINSULAS,  &c. 

An  Island  is  a portion  of  land  entirely  surrounded  by 
water. 

A Peninsula  is  a portion  of  land  almost  surrounded  by 
water. 

An  Isthmus  is  a neck  of  land  uniting  a peninsula  with 
the  main  land. 

The  Japan  Islands  lie  between  the  Sea  of  J.  and  the  P. 
Q.,  near  A.  (Map  of  Asia.) 

The  Philippine  Islands  lie  between  the  C.  Sea  and  the 
P.  Ocean,  near  A. 

Sumatra,  Borneo,  Celebes,  and  New  Guinea,  lie  between 
Aust.  and  A.  and  the  I.  and  P.  Oceans. 


16 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


New  Zealand  lies  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  near  Aust 
(Map  of  the  World.) 

The  Island  of  Madagascar  lies  in  the  Indian  Ocean, 
near  Africa. 

The  British  Islands  lie  between  the  N.  Sea  and  the  A. 
Ocean,  near  the  continent  of  E.  (Map  of  Europe.) 

Iceland  lies  in  the  A.  Ocean,  between  E.  and  N. 
America. 

Nova  Zembla  lies  in  the  A.  Ocean,  near  E.  and  A. 
Greenland,  supposed  to  be  an  island,  lies  between  the  A. 
and  A.  Oceans,  near  N.  A.  (Map  of  N.  America.) 

Newfoundland  lies  between  the  Gulf  of  St.  L.  and  the 
A.  Ocean,  near  N.  A. 

The  West  India  Islands  lie  between  the  C.  Sea  and  the 
A.  Ocean,  between  N.  and  S.  America. 

Spain  and  Portugal  are  a peninsula  lying  between  the 

A.  Ocean  and  the  M.  Sea.  (Map  of  Europe.) 

Noricay  and  Sweden  are  a peninsula,  lying  between  the 

B.  Sea  and  the  N.  Sea. 

Labrador  is  a peninsula,  lying  between  H.’s  Bay  and  the 
A.  Ocean.  (Map  of  N.  A.) 

The  Isthmus  of  Suez  lies  between  A.  and  A.  and  the  M. 
and  R.  Seas.  (Map  of  Africa.) 

The  Isthmus  of  Darien  lies  between  N.  and  S.  America 
and  the  P.  Ocean  and  the  C.  Sea.  (Map  of  S.  A.) 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  an  island  ? 2.  What  is  a peninsula  ? 
3.  What  is  an  isthmus?  4.  Where  are  the  Japan  Isles?  (Tell 
in  what  hemisphere,  zone,  ocean,  or  waters,  and  near  what  con- 
tinent, they  are ; so  in  each  case.)  5.  Where  are  the  Philippine 
Islands?  6.  Where  are  Sumatra,  Borneo,  Celebes, and  New  Guinea? 
7.  Where  is  New  Zealand  ? 8.  Where  is  Madagascar?  9.  Where 
are  the  British  Islands  ? 10.  Where  is  Iceland  ? 11.  Where  is  Nova 
Zembla  ? 12.  Where  is  Greenland  ? 13.  Where  is  Newfoundland  ? 
14.  Where  are  the  West  Indies  ? 15.  Mention  all  the  countries  in 
Asia  that  are  peninsulas.  16.  In  Europe.  17.  In  N.  America. 
18.  Where  is  the  Isthmus  of  Suez  ? 1 9.  Where  is  the  Isthmus  of 
Darien  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


MOUNTAINS  AND  PLAINS. 


17 


LESSON  VII. 
MOUNTAINS  AND  PLAINS. 


A Mountain  is  a vast  elevation  of  land. 

When  a mountain  emits  smoke  and  flame,  it  is  called  a 
volcano. 

Plains  are  large  surfaces  of  level  land.  When  these  lands 
are  covered  with  grass,  and  fed  by  vast  herds  of  cattle,  they 
are  called,  in  N.  America, prairies ; in  S.  America,  pampas ; 
in  Siberia,  steppes.  When  they  are  barren,  or  covered  with 
sand,  they  are  called  deserts. 

An  Oasis  is  a fertile  spot  in  a desert,  like  an  island  in 
an  ocean. 

The  Altai  Mountains  are  in  A.,  between  the  C.  empire 
and  Siberia.  (Map  of  Asia.) 

The  Himmaleh  Mountains  are  in  Asia,  between  the  C. 
empire  and  H. 

The  Mountains  of  the  Moon  are  in  Central  Africa,  and 
run  parallel  with  the  equator.  (Map  of  Africa.) 

The  Ural  Mountains  are  between  E.  and  A.  (Map  of 
Europe.) 

The  Alps  are  in  E.,  near  the  M.  Sea. 

The  Rocky  Mountains  are  in  N.  America,  and  run 
parallel  with  the  P.  Ocean. 

The  Andes  are  in  S.  America,  and  run  parallel  with  the 
P.  Ocean.  (Map  of  S.  America.) 

The  Sandy  Desert  and  Desert  of  Shamo  are  in  the  C. 
empire.  (Map  of  Asia.) 

The  Arabian  Desert  is  in  Arabia. 

The  Desert  of  Sahara,  or  Great  Desert,  is  in  A.,  between 
the  R.  Sea  and  the  A.  Ocean.  (Map  of  Africa.) 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  a mountain  ? 2.  When  is  a mountain 
a volcano?  3.  What  is  a plain ? 4.  When  plains  are  covered  with 
grass,  what  are  they  called  ? 5.  What  are  they  called  when  they  are 

covered  with  sand  ? 6.  What  is  an  oasis  ? 7.  Where  are  the  Altai 

2 * 


18 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


Mountains  ? (Tell  in  what  hemisphere,  zone,  continent,  and  country, 
or  countries,  they  are  situated.)  8.  Where  are  the  Himmaleh  Moun- 
tains ? 9.  Where  are  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon  ? 10.  Where  are 
the  Ural  Mountains?  11.  Where  are  the  Alps?  12.  Where  are  the 
Rocky  Mountains  ? 13.  Where  are  the  Andes  ? 14.  Where  are  the 
Sandy  Desert  and  Desert  of  Shamo  ? 15.  Where  is  the  Arabian 
Desert?  16.  Where  is  the  Desert  of  Sahara? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  VIII. 
THE  PRINCIPAL  SEAS. 


Seas  are  surfaces  of  salt  water  smaller  than  oceans. 

An  Archipelago  is  a sea  interspersed  with  islands. 

The  Sea  of  Olcotsh  lies  north-east  of  A.,  and  is  connected 
with  the  P.  Ocean.  (Map  of  the  World.) 

The  Chinese  Sea  lies  south-east  of  A.,  between  the  P. 
and  I.  Oceans. 

The  Arabian  Sea  lies  south  of  A.,  and  is  connected  with 
the  I.  Ocean. 

The  Red  Sea  lies  between  A.  and  A.,  and  is  connected 
with  the  Indian  Ocean. 

The  Caspian  Sea  lies  in  A.,  and  is  connected  with  no 
other  waters. 

The  Blade  Sea  lies  between  A.  and  E.,  and  is  connected 
with  the  M.  Sea. 

The  Mediterranean  Sea  lies  between  E.  and  A.,  and  is 
connected  with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  North  Sea  lies  west  of  Europe,  and  is  connected 
with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  Baltic  Sea  lies  in  E.,  and  is  connected  with  the  N. 
Sea  and  A.  Ocean. 

The  Caribbean  Sea  lies  between  N.  and  S.  A.,  and  is 
connected  with  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 


THE  PRINCIPAL  GULFS  AND  BATS. 


19 


QUESTIONS.  1.  What  are  seas?  2.  What  is  an  archipelago? 

3.  Where  is  the  Sea  of  Okotsk  ? (Tell  the  hemisphere,  zone,  conti- 
nent, and  ocean,  or  seas,  with  which  it  is  connected,  in  each  case.) 

4.  Where  is  the  Chinese  Sea  ? 5.  Where  is  the  Sea  of  Arabia  ? 

6.  Where  is  the  Red  Sea  ? 7.  Where  is  the  Caspian  Sea  ? 8.  Where 
is  the  Black  Sea  ? 9.  Where  is  the  Mediterranean  Sea  ? 10.  Where 
is  the  North  Sea?  11.  Where  is  the  Baltic  Sea?  12.  Where  is  the 
Caribbean  Sea  ? 13.  In  what  hemisphere  are  all  the  seas  ? 14.  In 

what  zone  are  nearly  all  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  IX. 

THE  PRINCIPAL  GULFS  AND  BAYS. 


Gulfs  or  Bays  are  parts  of  an  ocean  or  sea  extending 
into  the  main  land.  There  is  no  well-defined  distinction 
between  a gulf  and  a bay. 

The  Bay  of  Bengal  lies  south  of  A.,  and  is  connected 
with  the  I.  Ocean.  (Map  of  Asia.) 

The  Persian  Gulf  lies  between  P.  and  A.,  and  is  con- 
nected with  the  A.  Sea. 

The  Gulf  of  Guinea  lies  south-west  of  A.,  and  is  con- 
nected with  the  A.  Ocean.  (Map  of  Africa.) 

The  Gulf  of  Venice  lies  between  A.  and  I.,  and  is  con- 
nected with  the  M.  Sea.  (Map  of  Europe.) 

The  Bay  of  Biscay  lies  between  F.  and  S.,  and  is  con- 
nected with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  Gulf  of  Bothnia  lies  between  S.  and  R.,  and  is 
connected  with  the  Baltic  Sea. 

Baffin’s  Bay  lies  between  G.  and  B.  A.,  and  is  connected 
with  the  A.  Ocean.  (Map  of  N.  America.) 

Hudson’s  Bay  lies  in  B.  A.,  and  is  connected  with  the 
A.  Ocean. 


20 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


The  Gulf  of  St.  Laiorcncc  lies  east  of  B.  A.,  and  is  con- 
nected with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  Gulf  of  Mexico  lies  south  of  the  U.  S.,  and  is  con- 
nected with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  Gulf  of  California  lies  south-west  of  M.,  and  is 
connected  with  the  P.  Ocean. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  a gulf  or  bay ? 2.  Where  is  the  Bay 
of  Bengal  ? (Describe  each,  as  you  did  the  seas.)  3.  Where  is  the 
Persian  Gulf?  4.  Where  is  the  Gulf  of  Guinea?  5.  Where  is  the 
Gulf  of  Venice?  6.  Where  is  the  Bay  of  Biscay?  7.  Where  is 
the  Gulf  of  Bothnia?  8.  Where  is  Baffin’s  Bay?  9.  Where  is 
Hudson’s  Bay  ? 10.  Where  is  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  ? 11.  Where 
is  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  ? 12.  Where  is  the  Gulf  of  California  ? 

13.  In  what  hemisphere  are  all  the  gulfs  and  bays  on  the  globe  ? 

14.  In  what  zone  are  nearly  all  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  X . 

PRINCIPAL  SOUNDS,  STRAITS,  AND  CHANNELS. 


A Sound  is  a shallow  portion  of  an  ocean  or  sea. 

A Strait  is  a narrow  passage  of  water,  connecting  larger 
bodies. 

A Channel  is  a passage  of  water  wider  than  a strait. 

Long  Island  Sound  lies  between  Long  Island  and  the 
N.  E.  States,  and  is  connected  with  the  A.  Ocean.  (Map 
of  the  U.  States.) 

Albemarle  and  Pamlico  Sounds  lie  east  of  N.  C.,  and 
are  connected  with  the  A.  Ocean. 

Torres  Strait  separates  New  G.  from  Aust.,  and  con- 
nects the  P.  and  the  I.  Oceans.  (Map  of  Asia.) 

The  Strait  of  Malacca  separates  S.  from  M.,  and  con- 
nects the  C.  Sea  with  the  Bay  of  Bengal. 


SOUNDS,  STRAITS,  AND  CHANNELS. 


21 


The  Strait  of  Babelmandel  separates  A.  from  A.,  and 
connects  the  R.  Sea  with  the  I.  Ocean. 

The  Mozambique  Channel  separates  M.  from  A.,  and 
connects  different  parts  of  the  I.  Ocean.  (Map  of  Africa.) 

The  Strait  of  Gibraltar  separates  A.  from  E.,  and  con- 
nects the  M.  Sea  with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  Strait  of  Dover  and  British  Channel  separate  E. 
from  F.,  and  connect  the  N.  Sea  with  the  A.  Ocean. 
(Map  of  Europe.) 

The  Straits  of  Skager  Rack  and  Cattegat  separate  S. 
and  N.  from  D.,  and  connect  the  B.  and  N.  Seas. 

Behring  Strait  separates  A.  from  N.  A.,  and  connects 
the  A.  and  P.  Oceans.  (Map  of  N.  America.) 

Davis’s  Strait  separates  G.  from  B.  A.,  and  connects  B.’s 
Bay  with  the  A.  Ocean. 

Hudson’s  Strait  separates  James’s  Island  from  L.,  and 
connects  Hudson’s  Bay  with  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  Strait  of  Bellisle  separates  Newfoundland  from 
B.  A.,  and  connects  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  with  the  A. 
Ocean. 

The  Strait  of  Magellan  separates  T.  from  P.,  and  con- 
nects the  A.  and  P.  Oceans.  (Map  of  S.  America.) 


QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  a sound?  2.  What  is  a strait? 
3.  What  is  a channel  ? 4.  Where  is  Long  Island  Sound  ? (De- 
scribe as  before.)  5.  Where  are  Albemarle  and  Pamlico  Sounds  ? 
6.  Where  is  Torres  Strait?  (Tell  the  hemisphere  and  zone  ; also 
the  lands  they  separate,  and  the  waters  they  connect.)  7.  Where  is 
the  Strait  of  Malacca  ? 8.  Where  is  the  Strait  of  Babelmandel  ? 

9.  Where  is  the  Mozambique  Channel  ? 10.  Where  is  the  Strait 

of  Gibraltar?  11.  Where  are  the  Strait  of  Dover  and  the  British 
Channel ? 12.  Where  are  the  Straits  of  Skager  Rack  and  Catte- 
gat? 13.  Where  is  Behring’s  Strait  ? 14.  Where  is  Davis’s  Strait? 
15.  Where  is  Hudson’s  Strait?  16.  Where  is  the  Strait  of  Bellisle  ? 
17.  Where  is  the  Strait  of  Magellan  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


22 


GENERAL  VIEW. 


LESSON  XI. 

THE  PRINCIPAL  LAKES. 

Lakes  are  the  largest  collections  of  fresh  water  on  the 
globe. 

Ponds  are  smaller  collections  of  fresh  water. 

Lake  Baikal  lies  in  A.  near  the  A.  mountains. 

Lake  Wener  and  Lake  Wetter  lie  in  S.,  west  of  the  B. 
Sea.  (Map  of  Europe.) 

Lakes  Ladoga  and  Onega  lie  in  R.,  east  of  the  B.  Sea. 
Lake  Constance  and  Lake  Geneva  lie  in  S.,  near  the 

M.  Sea. 

Lake  Winnipeg  and  Slave  Lake  lie  in  B.  A.  (Map  of 

N.  A.) 

Lakes  Superior,  Michigan,  Huron,  Erie,  and  Ontario, 
lie  between  B.  A.  and  the  U.  S.  (Map  of  the  U.  States.) 

Lake  Maracayho  lies  in  Yen.  near  the  C.  Sea.  (Map 
of  S.  America.) 

Lake  Titicaca  lies  between  B.  and  P.,  near  the  P.  Ocean. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  a lake?  2.  What  is  a pond  ? 3.  Where 
is  LakeBaikal  ?(Describe,  as  in  case  of  the  seas.)  4.  Where  are  Lakes 
Wener  and  Wetter?  5.  Where  are  Lakes  Ladoga  and  Onega? 
6.  Where  are  Lakes  Constance  and  Geneva  ? 7.  Where  are  Lake 

Winnipeg  and  Slave  Lake  ? 8.  Where  are  the  Great  Lakes  ? 

9.  Where  is  Lake  Maracaybo  ? 10.  Where  is  Lake  Titicaca  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XII. 
THE  PRINCIPAL  RIVERS. 


A River  is  a stream  of  water  that  flows  from  the  main 
land  into  an  ocean,  or  other  bodies  of  water. 


THE  PRINCIPAL  RIVERS. 


23 


The  Branches  of  a river  are  the  side  streams  that  flow 
into  it. 

A Cascade  is  a sudden  fall  in  a small  river. 

A Cataract  is  a sudden  fall  in  a large  river. 

A Frith  is  the  widening  of  a river  near  its  mouth. 

The  Rivers  Obi,  Yenisei, and  Lena,  rise  in  the  Altai  Moun- 
tains, and  run  north  into  the  A.  Ocean.  (Map  of  Asia.) 

The  Hoang-Ho  and  the  Kiang-Ku  rise  near  the  deserts 
in  the  C.  empire,  and  run  E.  into  the  P.  Ocean. 

The  River  Indus  rises  in  the  H.  Mountains,  and  flows 
south  into  the  A.  Sea. 

The  River  Niger  rises  in  S.,  and  runs  south-east  into  the 
Gulf  of  G.  (Map  of  Africa.) 

The  River  Nile  rises  in  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon,  and 
runs  north  into  the  M.  Sea. 

The  Volga  River  rises  in  the  Ural  Mountains,  and  runs 
south  into  the  C.  Sea.  (Map  of  Europe.) 

The  River  Danube  rises  in  G.,  and  runs  east  into  the 
B.  Sea. 

The  St.  Lawrence  River  flows  from  the  Great  Lakes, 
north-east,  into  the  Gulf  of  St.  L.  (Map  of  N.  A.) 

The  Mississippi  River  rises  near  Lake  Superior,  and 
runs  south  into  the  Gulf  of  M. 

The  Missouri  River  rises  in  the  Rocky  Mountains,  and 
runs  south-east  into  the  M.  River. 

The  River  Amazon  rises  in  the  Andes,  and  flows  east 
into  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  (Map  of  S.  America.) 

The  River  La  Plata  rises  in  B.,  and  runs  south  into  the 
A.  Ocean. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  a river  ? 2.  What  is  the  branch  of  a 
river?  3.  What  is  a cascade  ? 4.  What  is  a cataract ? 5.  What  is 
a frith  ? 6.  Describe  the  Rivers  Obi,  Yenisei,  and  Lena.  (Tell 

where  they  rise,  which  way  they  run,  and  into  what  they  empty.) 
7.  Describe  the  Rivers  Hoang-Ho  and  Kiang-Ku.  8.  The  Indus. 
9.  The  Niger.  10.  The  Nile.  11.  The  Volga.  12.  The  Danube. 
13.  The  St.  Lawrence.  14.  The  Mississippi.  15.  The  Missouri. 
16.  The  Amazon.  17.  The  La  Plata. 


Review  Part  I. 


GEOGRAPHY 


PART  II. 

PARTICULAR  VIEW  OF  THE  EARTH. 


WORTH  AHURICA. 

LESSON  XIII. 

GENERAL  DESCRIPTION. 

Boundaries.  N.  America  is  bounded  north  by  the  A. 
Ocean;  east  by  the  A.  Ocean;  south  by  the  Gulf  of  M. 
and  the  P.  Ocean  ; west  by  the  P.  Ocean. 

Islands.  Greenland,  (supposed  to  be  an  island,)  Ice- 
land, Newfoundland,  Cape  Breton,  Long  Island,  and  the 
West  Indies. 

Capes.  Capes  Farewell  and  St.  Lucas,  and  Cape  Sable. 

Peninsulas.  Labrador,  Nova  Scotia,  Guatimala,  Yuca- 
tan, and  California. 

Mountains.  Rocky  Mountains,  Alleghany,  and  White 
Mountains. 

Plains.  The  vast  valley  of  the  Mississippi,  extending 
from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  to  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

Gulfs  and  Bays.  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  Gulf  of  Mex- 
ico, Gulf  of  California,  — Baffin’s,  Hudson’s,  and  James’s 
Bay,  Bay  ofFundy,  Honduras,  and  Campeachy. 

Straits.  Behring’s,  Davis’s,  Hudson’s  Straits,  and 
Strait  of  Bell  isle. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


25 


Lakes.  Slave  Lake,  Lake  Winnipeg,  Lake  of  the  Hills, 
Lakes  S.,  M.,  H.,  E.,  O.,  and  Lake  Nicaragua. 

Rivers.  Mackenzie’s,  St.  Lawrence,  Ottawa,  Mississippi, 
Red,  Arkansas,  Ohio,  Missouri,  Rio  Del  Norte,  Colorado, 
and  Columbia. 

Minerals.  Gold,  silver,  copper,  lead,  tin,  quicksilver, 
iron,  salt,  coal,  and  excellent  quarries  of  marble,  granite, 
and  limestone. 

Divisions.  N.  America  is  divided  into  Russian  Posses- 
sions, British  America,  United  States,  Texas,  Mexico,  and 
Guatimala. 

Inhabitants.  N.  America  is  inhabited  by  Indians  of  vari- 
ous races  in  an  uncivilized  state,  and  by  European  races. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  N.  America  bounded?  2.  What 
islands  near?  3.  What  capes?  4.  Peninsulas?  5.  Mountains? 
6.  Plains  ? 7.  What  gulfs  and  bays  in  N.  A.  ? 8.  What  straits  ? 
9.  Lakes?  10.  Rivers?  11.  Minerals?  12.  What  are  the  civil 
divisions?  13.  By  whom  is  N.  America  inhabited? 

Review  Part  I. 


LESSON  XIV. 

UNITED  STATES. 

Boundaries.  The  United  States  are  bounded  north  by 
British  America,  east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  the  Gulf  of 
M.,  and  by  T.  and  M.,  and  west  by  the  Western  Territories. 

Waters.  Massachusetts,  Delaware,  and  Chesapeake 
Bays;  the  Gulf  of  Mexico;  Long  Island,  Albemarle,  and 
Pamlico  Sounds  ; the  Great  Lakes  on  the  northern  border, 
Lake  Champlain,  east  of  N.  Y. ; the  St.  Lawrence,  Mis- 
sissippi, Arkansas,  Ohio,  and  Missouri  Rivers. 

Mountains.  Alleghany,  Ozark,  and  White  Mountains. 

Productions.  These  vary  with  the  latitude.  In  the 
Northern,  Middle,  and  Western  States,  grain  of  all  kinds 
is  raised  ; and  the  extensive  pastures  sustain  a great  num- 


26 


PARTICULAR  VIEW 


her  of  cattle  and  sheep  , from  which  butter,  cheese,  beef, 
hides,  and  wool,  are  produced.  In  the  Southern  States, 
cotton,  tobacco,  rice,  and  sugar,  are  cultivated. 

Capitals  and  Chief  Towns.  The  City  of  Washington  is 
the  capital.  It  is  situated  upon  the  Potomac  River,  in  the 
District  of  Columbia,  of  which  it  is  also  the  capital.  The 
United  States  Capitol,  built  of  elegant  freestone,  and  the 
other  public  buildings,  are  splendid.  The  population  of 
..his  city  is  30,000. 


Capitol  at  Washington. 


The  District  of  Columbia  is  a tract  of  land  10  miles 
square,  ceded  to  the  nation  by  Virginia  and  Maryland. 
It  lies  on  both  sides  of  the  Potomac  River.  It  is  under 
the  government  of  the  United  States. 

Alexandria  and  Georgetown  are  the  other  principal 
towns  in  this  District.  Each  has  considerable  trade,  and 
about  9,000  inhabitants. 

New  York,  Philadelphia,  Baltimore,  Boston,  New  Or- 
leans, and  Cincinnati  are  the  principal  cities  in  theU.  S 

Government.  A confederated  republic. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


27 


These  states  declared  themselves  independent  of  Great 
Britain  in  1776.  The  Federal  Constitution  was  adopted 
in  1789. 

A Republic  is  a form  of  government  where  the  people 
elect  their  rulers ; or  where  all  the  power  proceeds  directly 
from  the  people,  through  their  representatives. 

A Confederacy  is  several  distinct  governments,  united  in 
one  general  government. 

A Confederated  Republic  is  a government  formed  by  the 
union  of  several  smaller  republics.  In  a confederacy,  the 
different  governments  may  be  united  in  a single  point,  and 
for  a single  purpose  ; or  they  may  be  united  in  several 
points,  and  for  a variety  of  purposes,  which  is  the  case  in 
the  United  States.  Governments  of  different  kinds  are 
sometimes  united  into  a confederacy. 

Religion.  Protestant. 

The  Protestant  religion  includes  all  those  religious  sects 
that  are  distinct  from  the  Roman  Catholic  church.  The 
Protestants  are  so  called  from  the  fact  that  they  protested 
against  the  Catholic  church,  in  the  time  of  the  reformation. 

The  Roman  Catholics  believe  in  the  supremacy  and  in- 
fallibility of  the  pope,  and  adhere  to  certain  doctrines  and 
forms  that  are  rejected  by  the  Protestants.  They  are  also 
called  Papists. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  In  the  New  England, 
Middle,  and  W estern  States,  it  is  comparatively  good.  A 
common  school  system  prevails  here  to  a considerable  extent. 
In  the  Southern  States,  the  existence  of  Slavery  exerts 
an  unfavorable  influence  upon  society. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  are  the  United  States  bounded . 5 2.  What 
waters  in  the  U.  S.  ? 3.  Mountains?  4.  What  are  the  produc- 
tions ? 5.  What  is  the  capital  ? 6.  What  is  said  of  the  District  of 

Columbia?  7.  What  are  the  chief  towns  in  this  District?  8.  Men- 
tion some  of  the  principal  cities  in  the  U.  S.  9.  What  is  the  form 
of  government ? 10.  What  took  place  in  1776  ? 11.  What  in  1789? 
12.  What  is  a republic  ? 13.  What  is  a confederacy  ? 14.  How 

are  governments  united  in  a confederacy?  15.  What  is  the  religion 
of  the  U.  S. ? 16.  What  does  the  Protestant  religion  include? 

17.  Why  are  the  Protestants  so  called  ? 18.  What  is  said  of  the 
Roman  Catholics  ? 19.  What  is  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  six  preceding  lessons. 


28 


Particular  view. 


Second  Course.  (The  questions  not  numbered  are  to  be  omitted 
the  first  time  going  through  the  work.  They  are  to  be  answered,  in 
addition  to  the  stated  questions,  by  those  only  who  go  through  the 
book  a second  time.  Mention  all  the  bays  and  gulfs  that  touch  the 
U.  S.  Mention  all  the  lakes,  sounds,  capes,  mountains,  and  prin- 
cipal rivers.  How  is  the  District  of  Columbia  situated  ? Which  way 
from  Chesapeake  Bay  ? Which  way  from  Lake  Erie  ? Which  way 
from  tbs  Gulf  of  Mexico  f) 


LESSON  XV. 

Maine,  New  Hampshire,  Vermont,  Massachusetts,  Rhode 
Island,  and  Connecticut,  are  called  the  New  England  Stales. 
The  early  inhabitants  originated  mostly  from  England. 


MAINE  AND  NEW  HAMPSHIRE. 
MAINE. 


State  House  in  Maine. 

Boundaries.  Maine  is  bounded  north  by  C.,  east  by  N. 
B.,  south  by  the  A.  Ocean,  west  by  N.  II.,  and  C. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


29 


Rivers.  St.John,  Penobscot,  Kennebec,  Androseoggin, 
and  Saco. 

Mountains.  Katahdin,  Saddleback  and  Mars  Hill. 

Productions.  Corn  and  grain  of  various  kinds,  includ 
ing  wheat,  rye,  oats,  barley ; the  products  of  the  pasture, 
including  beef,  wool,  butter,  cheese,  &,c. ; and  timbers, 
including  boards,  staves,  shingles,  clapboards,  and  ship- 
timber. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  The  capital  is  Augusta. 
It  is  situated  at  the  head  of  navigation,  on  the  Kennebec 
River.  It  is  a neat  and  flourishing  place.  The  State  House 
is  a beautiful  granite  edifice.  An  Arsenal  and  Insane  Hos- 
pital are  located  here.  Population,  6,000. 

Portland,  on  Casco  Bay,  is  a pleasant  and  beautiful  city. 
It  has  a fine  harbor  and  good  commercial  advantages. 
The  Exchange  is  one  of  the  handsomest  erections  in  New 
England.  Population,  17000. 

Bangor,  at  the  head  of  navigation  on  the  PeuGbscot,  is  a 
growing  city.  A Theological  Seminary  is  established  here. 
The  trade  of  this  city  equals,  perhaps  exceeds,  that  of  any 
other  town  in  the  state.  Population,  10,000. 

Other  principal  towns  are  Bath,  Hallowell,  Gardiner, 
Saco,  Thomaston,  Calais  and  Eastport. 

Government.  Republican.  The  executive  department 
is  vested  in  a Governor  and  council ; the  Legislative,  in 
a Senate  and  House  of  Representives ; the  Judiciary  in  a 
Supreme  and  a lower  Court. 

Religion.  Protestant.  Most  of  the  different  denomi- 
nations of  Christians  are  found  in  this  state,  and  the  in- 
stitutions of  Religion  are  generally  regarded.  Theolog- 
ical schools  at  Bangor  and  Readfield. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Good.  A common  school 
system  is  established  here  by  law,  which  affords  equal 
advantages  to  all.  Colleges  at  Brunswick  and  Waterville. 

Remarks.  Maine  has  a long  line  of  sea-coast,  upon  which 
are  many  fine  harbors  and  flourishing  villages.  In  the  hack  parts 
of  the  state  there  are  vast  timber  forests.  In  ship-building, 
Maine  ranks  first  in  the  United  States : in  the  value  of  its 
shipping,  it  ranks  fourth.  There  are  several  valuable  mines,  and 
quarries  of  granite  and  limestone,  in  the  state.  Remnants  of  the 
Penobscot  and  Passamaquoddy  tribes  of  Indians  still  exist  here,. 


30 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


NEW  HAMPSHIRE. 

Boundaries.  N.  H.  is  bounded  north  by  C.,  east  by  M.f 
south  by  M.,  west  by  V. 

Rivers.  Connecticut  and  Merrimack. 

Mountains.  The  White  Mountains. 

Productions.  Same  as  in  Maine. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Concord,  on  the  Merrimack, 
is  the  capital.  It  has  a beautiful  location.  A State  House, 
State  Prison,  and  other  important  buildings,  are  here, 
Population,  4,600. 

Portsmouth,  on  the  Piscataqua,  has  a fine  harbor,  a 
Navy-Yard,  and  a Lunatic  Asylum.  A splendid  bridge 
connects  this  town  with  Maine.  Population,  9,000. 

Dover,  the  oldest  town  in  the  state,  is  a large  manufac- 
turing place.  Ponulation,  6,800. 

Manchester  is  a thriving  manufacturing  town.  Pop- 
illation,  11,000. 

Exeter,  Keene,  Amherst  and  Hanover  are  considerable 
towns. 

Government.  (See  Maine.) 

Religion.  Similar  to  Maine.  Theological  schools  at 
Gilmanton  and  N.  Hampton. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Same  as  in  Maine 
Dartmouth  College,  at  Hanover. 

Remarks.  N.  Hampshire  spreads  out,  from  the  ocean,  like  a 
fan.  Upon  the  northern  border  of  the  state  are  the  White  Moun 
tains.  The  “ Notch  Road,”  through  these  mountains,  is  a great 
curiosity.  From  Mount  Washington,  the  highest  peak,  and  the 
highest  mountain  east  of  the  Mississippi  River,  the  ocean  is  dis 
tinctly  seen.  The  view  here  is  grand  beyond  description. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Maine  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the  riv 
ers  ? (Mention  two  or  three  of  the  longest;  so  in  each  case.)  3.  Moun 
tains?  4.  What  are  the  productions?  5.  The  capital  and  chief 
towns?  (Mention  two  chief  towns  in  each  case.)  6.  What  is  the  gov 
eminent?  7.  What  is  said  of  the  religious  sects?  8.  Of  the  state  of 
education  and  morals  ? 9.  How  is  N.  Hampshire  bounded  ? 10.  Wha 
are  the  rivers  ? 11.  Mountains  ? 12.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


31 


towns?  13.  What  is  the  government?  14.  What  is  said  of  the 
religious  sects  ? 15.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  first  six  lessons  of  Part  I. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Me.  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital?  Describe  the  waters.  ( Waters  include  rivers,  gulfs, 
lakes,  &c.  To  describe  a river,  tell  where  it  rises,  which  way  it  runs, 
through  what,  and  into  what,  it  flows,  its  length,  &c.  Mention, 
in  each  case,  the  size,  situation,  &c.,  of  gulfs,  lakes,  and  the  like.) 
What  else  of  interest  ? ( Here  the  j udgment  of  the  scholar  and  teacher 
is  to  be  exercised.  The  answer  will  refer  to  peculiarities , such  as 
mountains,  canals,  railroads,  cataracts,  &c.  &c.) 

What  was  said  of  N.  H.  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Augusta  to  Rome  ? 


LESSON  XVI. 

MASSACHUSETTS  AND  VERMONT. 

MASSACHUSETTS. 

Boundaries.  Massachusetts  is  bounded  north  by  V.  and 
N.  H.,  east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  the  A.  Ocean,  R.  I., 
and  C.,  west  by  N.  Y. 

Rivers.  Connecticut  and  Merrimack. 

Mountains.  The  Green  Mountains  extend  through  this 
state,  from  Vermont. 

Productions.  Same  as  in  Maine,  generally,  excepting 
timber. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Boston,  the  capital,  is  the 
emporium  of  N.  England.  It  is  a rich  and  beautiful  city. 
It  has  an  extensive  commerce.  The  State  House,  Market 
House,  Exchange,  and  several  of  the  churches  and  hotels, 
are  elegant  structures.  The  Common,  covering  nearly  50 
acres,  forms  a splendid  park.  Population,  130,000. 

Lowell,  on  the  Merrimack,  is  a large  manufacturing 
place.  The  capital  invested  here  is  §9,000,000.  This 
city  has  had  a very  rapid  growth.  Population,  20,000. 

Salem  is  a quiet  and  pleasm-t  city.  It  has  some  fine 


32 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


buildings.  The  Museum  of  the  East  India  Marine  Society 
contains  rich  collections  from  all  parts  of  the  world.  The 
Boston  and  Portsmouth  Railroad  is  tunnelled  under  the 
centre  of  this  city.  The  work  is  a great  curiosity.  Pop- 
ulation, 15,000. 

The  other  principal  towns  are  Newburyport,  Lynn, 
Plymouth,  New  Bedford,  Charlestown,  Worcester,  and 
Andover. 

Government.  (See  Maine.) 


Trinity  Church , Boston. 


Religion.  Nearly  Similar  to  Maine.  Religious 
institutions  have  uniformly  received  a liberal  sup- 
port in  this  state.  There  are  Theological  Schools 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


33 


at  Cambridge,  Andover,  Newton  and  Wilbraham. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maine,  in 
general.) 

There  are  colleges  at  Cambridge,  Amherst,  and  Wil- 
li amstown. 

Remarks.  Massachusetts  is  the  oldest,  richest,  and  most  popu- 
lous, of  the  N.  E.  States.  It  is  distinguished  for  its  manufactures 
and  commerce,  and  for  the  intelligence,  enterprise,  and  steadfast- 
ness, of  its  inhabitants.  The  western  part  of  the  state  is  mountain- 
ous. The  valley  of  tire  Connecticut  has  a fertile  soil  and  a beau- 
tiful scenery.  There  are  remnants  of  several  Indian  tribes 
around  Buzzard’s  Bay  and  Martha’s  Vineyard.  The  most  elegant 
granite  and  marble  are  wrought  in  this  state.  Coal,  iron,  mag- 
netic ore,  and  copper,  are  also  found. 


VERMONT. 

Boundaries.  Vermont  is  bounded  north  by  C.,  east  by 
N.  H.,  south  by  M.,  west  by  N.  Y. 

Rivers.  The  Connecticut,  Onion,  and  Otter  Creek. 

Lake.  Champlain. 

Mountains.  The  Green  Mountains. 

Productions.  (See  Maine,  generally.)  Large  quantities 
of  live  stock  are  raised  in  this  state. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Montpelier,  on  the  Onion,  is 
the  capital.  It  is  a romantic  village.  It  has  an  elegant 
State  House,  a Court  House,  and  several  factories.  Popu- 
lation, 2,500. 

Burlington,  on  Lake  Champlain,  has  a tine  location,  and 
a beautiful  scenery.  Vermont  University  is  located  here. 
Population,  4,500. 

Middlebury  has  a college  and  several  factories.  Popu- 
lation, 4,000. 

Government.  Very  similar  to  Maine. 

Religion.  See  Maine.  Churches  are  established  and 
public  worship  sustained  by  the  different  denomina- 
tions of  Christians,  pretty  generally  throughout  the 
state.  A 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Some  as  in  Maine. 
There  are  colleges  at  Burlington  and  Middlebury. 


34 


Particular  view. 


Remarks.  Vermont  is  an  inland  state.  The  land  is  uneven , 
but  generally  productive.  On  the  eastern  side  of  the  state  is  the 
valley  of  the  Connecticut ; on  the  western,  the  valley  of  Lake 
Champlain  ; and  between  these  are  the  lofty  ridges  of  the  Green 
Mountains.  The  scenery  around  these  mountains  is  grand.  Quar- 
ries of  excellent  marble,  and  also  iron,  lead,  copper,  and  zinc,  are 
found  in  the  state. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Massachusetts  bounded?  2.  What  are 
its  rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  Capital  and  chief 
towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  What  is  said  of  the  reli- 
gious sects?  8.  State  of  education  and  morals?  9.  How  is  Ver- 
mont bounded ? 10.  What  rivers  and  lake?  11.  What  mountains? 
12.  What  are  the  productions?  13.  Capital  and  chief  towns? 
14.  What  is  the  government?  15.  What  of  the  religion?  16.  The 
state  of  education  and  morals?  (When  reference  is  made  to  another 
state,  the  same  answer  is  to  be  given  that  was  given  for  that  state.) 

Review  from  the  sixth  lesson,  in  Part  I.,  to  Part  II. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Massa- 
chusetts ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Vermont  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Boston  to  Hague  ? 




LESSON  XVII. 

RHODE  ISLAND  AND  CONNECTICUT. 

RHODE  ISLAND. 

Boundaries.  Rhode  Island  is  bounded  north  and  east 
by  M.,  south  by  the  A.  Ocean,  west  by  C. 

Rivers.  Pawtucket  and  Pawtuxet.  These  are  small 
streams;  but  they  afford  fine  mill  seats.  Narragansett 
Bay. 

Productions.  (See  Massachusetts,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Providence,  at  the  head  of 
Narragansett  Bay,  is  considered  the  capital,  though  the 
legislature  often  meets  at  other  places.  It  is  built  on  both 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


35 


sides  of  the  Pawtucket.  There  are  many  beautiful  edifices 
in  the  town,  among  which  is  a splendid  Arcade.  The 
population  is  23,000. 


Newport  is  a place  of  some  business,  but  is  considered 
on  the  decline.  Population,  8,090. 

Pawtucket  is  a flourishing  manufacturing  village,  built  on 
Pawtucket  Falls.  It  is  partly  in  Massachusetts.  Popula- 
tion, 8,500.  Other  towns  are  Bristol  and  Warwick. 

Government.  Similar  to  the  other  New  England 
states.  A new  Constitution  has  been  recently  adopted, 
instead  of  the  old  Charter  of  1683,  from  Charles  II. 
king  of  England. 

O O 

Religion.  Like  Maine  in  its  general  features. 

Education  and  Morals.  Nearly  the  same  as  in 
Maine. 

Brown  University  is  at  Providence.  The  Friends  have  a 
flourishing  institution  here 

Remarks.  This  is  a small  state,  and  the  last  of  the  “thirteen  ” 
that  adopted  the  Federal  Constitution.  The  soil  is  good,  the  trade 


36 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


extensive.  It  has  large  manufacturing  interests,  and  much  wealth, 
for  its  size.  The  Narragansett  tribe  ot  Indians  still  exist  here, 
and  are  in  a civilized  state.  Coal,  iron,  and  limestone,  are 
found  in  large  quantities. 

CONNECTICUT. 

Boundaries.  Connecticut  is  bounded  north  by  M.,  east 
by  R.  I.,  south  by  L.  I.  Sound,  west  by  N.  Y. 

Rivers.  The  Connecticut,  Thames,  and  Housatonic. 


Mountains.  A continuation  of  the  Green  Mountain 
ridges.  They  take  various  names  in  this  state. 

Productions.  (See  Massachusetts,  in  general.)  v 


Distant  View  of  Hartford. 


Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Hartford  and  New  Haven 
are  alternately  the  capitals.  Hartford  is  pleasantly  situ- 
ated on  the  Connecticut  River.  It  has  an  Asylum  for  the 
Deaf  and  Dumb,  one  for  the  Insane,  and  several  factories. 
The  trade  is  large.  Population,  11,000. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


37 


New  Haven  is  a beautiful  city.  It  is  richly  ornamented 
with  trees.  It  has  considerable  trade.  It  is  the  seat  of 
Yale  College.  Population,  13,000. 

New  London  is  a place  of  increasing  interest  and  trade. 
Population,  5,700. 

The  other  towns  of  note  are  Middletown,  Fairfield, 
Litchfield,  and  Norwich. 

Government.  (See  Maine.) 

Religion.  This  state  ranks  high  for  the  religious 

character  of  its  inhabitants  and  its  support  of  religious 
institutions.  There  are  Theological  Schools  at  New 

Haven  and  East  Windsor. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  N.  E.  States,  in 
general.)  Yale  College  at  N.  Haygn,  Washington  College 
at  Hartford,  Wesleyan  University  at ‘Middletown. 

Remarks.  This  state  is  distinguished  for  the  richness  of  its 
Boil  and  the  beauty  of  its  scenery.  It  is  noted  also  for  its  manu- 
factures and  wealth,  for  the  value  of  its  institutions,  and  for  the 
intelligence  of  the  people.  It  has  a fund  of  $2,000,000  for  com- 
mon schools.  There  are  remnants  of  the  Mohegan  and  Pequot 
tribes  of  Indians  in  this  state.  Iron,  copper,  lead,  and  marble,  are 
found  here. 

QUESTIONS.  I.  How  is  Rhode  Island  bounded  ? 2.  What  are 
its  rivers  and  bay  ? 3.  Its  productions  ? 4.  Capital  and  chief 

towns?  5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  What  is  said  of  the  reli- 
gious sects?  7.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals?  8.  How  is 
Connecticut  bounded  ? 9.  What  are  its  rivers  ? 10.  Mountains  ? 

11.  Productions?  12.  Capital  and  chief  towns?  13.  What  is  the 
government?  14.  What  is  said  of  the  religious  sects  ? 15.  State  of 

education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Rhode 
Island?  Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ^ 

What  was  said  of  Connecticut?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  N.  London  to  Aberdeen  ? 

4 


38 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


LESSON  XVIII. 

The  five  following  states  are  called  Middle  States:  New 
York,  New  Jersey,  Pennsylvania,  Delaware,  and  Maryland. 

NEW  YORK  AND  NEW  JERSEY. 


NEW  YORK. 


City  Hall  at  JYew  York. 


Boundaries.  New  York  is  bounded  north-west  and  north 
by  Lakes  E.  and  O , and  by  C.,  east  by  V.,  M.,  and  C.,  south 
by  N.  J.  and  P. 

Rivers.  The  St.  Lawrence,  Hudson,  and  Mohawk 

Mountains.  The  Appalachian  and  Catskill. 

Productions.  Wheat  is  the  staple;  fruits  of  various 
kinds.  In  other  respects,  see  Massachusetts. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Albany,  on  the  Hudson,  is 
the  capital.  It  is  a place  of  much  wealth  and  trade.  It 
has  many  fine  buildings,  and  30,000  inhabitants. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


39 


New  York  is  the  first  city  in  America  for  size,  wealth, 
and  trade.  The  City  Hall,  Exchange,  Custom  House,  and 
University,  are  splendid  buildings.  Many  of  the  churches 
and  hotels  are  elegant.  The  water-works,  just  completed, 
add  great  interest  and  convenience  to  the  place.  Popula- 
tion, 380,000. 

Troy  has  an  extensive  trade.  Population,  20,000. 

West  Point,  Auburn,  Hudson,  Schenectady,  Buffalo,  and 
Rochester,  are  places  of  note. 

Government.  Much  like  the  N.  E.  States. 

Religion.  See  N.  E.  States.  There  are  about  40  so- 
cieties for  the  various  objects  of  religious  benevolence, 
whose  business  location  is  in  the  Cpy  of  N.  Y.  Theo- 
logical SchoclSfcin^the  City  of  N Y-3  Auburn,  Hamil- 
ton, Hartwich,  Newburgh,  and  Whijn,i  n 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  N.  E.  States.) 
The  University  of  N.  York,  and  Columbia  College,  at  New 
York  city;  Union  College  at  Schenectady,  Hamilton  Col- 
lege at  Clinton,  and  Geneva  College. 

Remarks.  New  York  has  a fine  climate  and  a rich  soil.  Its 
advantages  for  commerce  are  great  For  internal  improvements, 
wealth,  and  trade,  New  York  stands  unrivalled  among  the  states. 
Its  territory  touches  the  waters  of  the  Atlantic  and  the  lakes. 
These  waters  are  united  by  canals  and  railroads,  running  through 
the  heart  df  the  state.  The  Salt  Springs  here  are  of  great  value. 
The  Mineral  Springs  at  Saratoga  and  Ballstown  are  places  of 
resort  for  invalids  and  the  fashionable  from  all  parts  of  the  country. 
There  are  views  from  the  Catskill  Mountains  of  unsurpassed 
beauty.  The  Falls  of  Niagara  are  among  the  wonders  of  the 
world.  The  waters  of  nearly  half  the  continent  make  a plunge  of 
over  160  feet.  There  are  the  remains  of  several  Indian  nations 
in  this  state.  Iron,  lead,  limestone,  freestone,  and  marble,  are 
fbund  here  in  abundance. 

NEW  JERSEY. 

Boundaries.  New  Jersey  is  bounded  north  by  N.  Y., 
east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  D.  Bay,  west  by  D.  and  P. 

Rivers.  The  Delaware  and  Hudson.  Delaware  Bay. 

Mountains.  (See  New  York.)  An  extension  of  the 
Appalachian  chain. 

Productions.  (See  New  York.) 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


4ft 


Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Trenton,  on  the  Delaware,  is 
the  capital.  It  has  a State  House  and  several  elegant 
buildings.  Population,  4,000. 

Newark  is  well  laid  out,  has  an  elegant  public  square, 
and  several  factories.  Population,  22,000. 

Paterson  is  a flourishing  manufacturing  place.  Popu- 
lation, 13,0110. 

Government.  See  New  England  States. 

Religion.  Very  similar  to  the  New  England  States, 
The  Theological  Seminary  of  the  Dutch  Reformed  church 
was  established  at  New  Brunswick,  in  1784.  That  of 
the  Presbyterian  church,  at  Princeton,  in  1812. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  N.  E.  States,  in  general.) 
Colleges  are  Nass)fa  Hall  at  Princeton,  Rutgers  College  at 
New  Brunswick 


Remarks.  Some  parts  of  this  state  are  hilly,  others,  level. 
Some  parts  are  fertile,  others,  barren.  It  has  large  manufacturing 
interests.  Sandstone  and  limestone  arc  found  here. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  N.  Y.  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  15.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  the  chief  towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  What  is 
said  of  the  religious  sects?  8.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals? 
9.  How  is  New  Jersey  bounded  ? 10.  What  are  the  rivers  of  N.  J.? 

11.  Mountains?  12.  Productions?  13.  What  are  the  capital  and  the 
chief  towns  ? 14.  What  is  the  government?  15.  What  is  said  of 

the  religious  sects?  16.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  New 
York?  Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  New  Jersey?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Albany  to  Naples? 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


41 


LESSON  XIX. 


DELAWARE  AND  MARYLAND, 


DELAWARE. 

Boundaries.  Delaware  is  bounded  north  by  P.,  east  by 
D.  Bay  and  the  A.  Ocean,  south  and  west  by  M. 

River.  Delaware  River,  and  Bay. 

Productions.  (See  New  York.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Dover  is  the  capital.  It  is  a 
neat  and  flourishing  town.  Population,  1,800. 

Wilmington  is  a place  of  considerable  trade.  Its  loca- 
tion is  pleasant,  and  its  plan  good.  Population,  12,000. 

Newcastle  was  once  the  capital.  t 

Government.  (See  New  England  States.)  A General 
Assembly  of  representatives  and  senators,  chosen  by  the 
people,  compose  the  legislature.  The  Governor  is  chos- 
en once  in  four  years. 

Religion.  Similar  in  its  general  aspects,  to  the  New 
England  states. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals  Middling;  or  on  an 
average  with  the  whole  country.  College  at  Newark. 

Remarks.  Delaware  is  a small  and  thinly-inhabited  state. 
In  the  southern  part,  the  soil  is  sandy  and  barren ; in  the  northern, 
it  is  more  hilly  and  productive.  The  best  flour  in  the  country  ia 
manufactured  here. 


MARYLAND. 

Boundaries.  Maryland  is  bounded  north  by  P.,  east  by 
D.  and  the  A.  Ocean,  and  south-west  by  V, 

Rivers,  The  Potomac  and  Susquehanna.  Chesapeake 
Bay. 

Mountains.  The  same  as  in  New  York— » the  Appalachian. 
4* 


42 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Productions.  Wheat,  Indian  corn,  tobacco,  some  rice, 
and  cotton. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Annapolis,  on  the  Chesa- 
peake, is  the  capital.  The  streets  diverge  from  a common, 
upon  which  stands  the  State  House.  Population,  3,500. 


View  of  Baltimore. 


Baltimore  is  distinguished  for  its  monuments,  its  splen- 
did cathedral,  its  commerce,  beauty,  and  thrift.  Popula- 
tion, 110,000, 

Frederick  is  very  pleasantly  situated,  and  has  considerable 
trade.  Population,  7,000. 

Hagerstown  and  Cumberland  are  flourishing  villages. 

Government.  (See  New  England  States,  in  general.)  The 
Senate  and  House  of  Delegates  compose  the  legislature. 
Suffrage  is  limited  to  the  white  population. 

Religion.  Generally  similar  to  the  New  England 
states.  The  Roman  Catholics  are  more  numerous  in 
this  state,  in  proportion  to  its  population. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals,  Poor,  if  the  colored 
population  are  taken  into  the  account.  They  have  no  com 
mon  school  system  ; and  slavery  exists  here.  There  is  a 
university  and  a Catholic  college  at  Baltimore.  St.  John’s 
College  is  at  Annapolis. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


43 


Remarks.  The  soil  in  this  state  is  generally  good.  The 
part  east  of  the  bay  is  level ; the  part  west  of  the  bay  is  moun- 
tainous. The  commerce  and  manufactures  of  this  state  are  ex- 
tensive. Iron,  coal,  copper,  and  limestone,  are  found  here. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Delaware  bounded  ? 2.  What  river 
and  bay?  3.  What  are  the  productions?  4.  What  are  the  capital 
and  the  chief  towns?  5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  What  is 
said  of  the  religious  sects  ? 7.  What  is  the  state  of  education  and 

morals  ? 8.  How  is  Maryland  bounded  ? 9.  What  rivers  and  bay  ? 

10.  What  mountains ? 11.  Productions?  12.  What  are  the  capital 

and  the  chief  towns  ? 13.  What  is  the  government  ? 14.  What  is 

said  of  the  religious  sects  ? 15.  Of  the  state  of  education  and 
morals  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Dela- 
ware ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Maryland?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Baltimore  to  London  ? 

« 


LESSON  XX. 


PENNSYLVANIA  AND  OHIO, 


PENNSYLVANIA. 

Boundaries.  Pennsylvania  is  bounded  north  by  Lake  E. 
*and  N.  Y.,  east  by  N.  Y.  and  N.  J.,  south  by  D.,  M.,  and 
V.,  west  by  V.  and  O. 

Rivers.  The  Delaware,  Susquehanna,  and  Ohio,  formed 
by  a union  of  the  Alleghany  and  Monongahela. 

Mountains.  The  Appalachian,  here  called  the  Alle- 
ghany, Mountains.  (See  New  York.) 

Productions.  (See  New  York,  in  general.)  Some  hemp 
and  flax  are  raised. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Harrisburg  is  the  capital. 
Its  plan  is  regular ; the  scenery  around,  romantic.  Pod- 
ulation,  5,200. 


41 


ARTICULAR  VIEW, 


Philadelphia  is  a large  and  elegant  city.  The  streets, 
crossing  each  other  at  right  angles,  are  beautiful.  It  ha? 
air  extensive  commerce.  The  public  buildings  are  Girard 
College,  the  Exchange,  and  Asylum.  The  water-works 
are  a great  curiosity.  They,  cost  $500,000.  Population, 
200,000. 


Pittsburg  is  an  extensive  manufacturing  place.  Popu- 
lation, 45,000.  The  other  principal  towns  are  Lancaster, 
Reading,  and  York. 

Government.  (See  New  England  States.)  The  Senate 
and  House  of  Representatives,  elected  by  the  people, 
compose  the  legislature,  called  the  General  Assembly. 

Religion.  See  the  N.  E.  states.  Pa.  was  fiVst  settled  by  3 
colony  of  Friends  under  Win.  Penn,  and  this  sect  is  still 
numerous  in  this  state.  There  are  Theol.  Schools  at  Gettys- 
burg, York,  Alleghany  Town,  Canonsburg  and  Pittsburg. 

Education  and  Moral's.  (See  Delaware.)  The  colleges 
are  Girard  College  and  the  university  at  Philadelphia. 
Dickinson  College  at  Carlisle,  also  Jefferson,  Washington, 
Lafayette,  Marshall,  Pennsylvania,  Alleghany,  and  Pitts 
burg  Colleges, 


NORTH  AMERICA, 


45 


Remarks.  Pennsylvania  vies  with  New  York  in  agriculture, 
manufactures,  and  internal  improvements.  The  climate  is  agree-’ 
able,  and  the  soil  good.  This  state  is  divided  by  ridges  of  the 
Alleghany  Mountains.  The  part  east  of  the  mountains  is  smooth 
and  fertile.  The  part  west  is  rough  and  hilly.  Great  quantities 
of  pit  coal  are  found  in  this  state ; also  iron  ore,  and  marble  of 
a fine  quality. 

The  following  states  are  called  Western  States  : Ohio, 

Michigan,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Missouri,  Arkansas,  Kentucky, 
Tennessee,  Iowa  and  Wisconsin. 

OHIO. 

Boundaries.  Ohio  is  bounded  north  by  M.  and  Lake  E., 
east  by  P.  and  V.,  south  by  V.  and  K.,  west  by  I. 

Rivers.  The  Ohio,  Scioto,  and  Muskingum. 

Productions.  Indian  corn,  grains,  tobacco,  hemp,  pork, 
and  wool. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Columbus  is  the  capital.  It 
is  pleasantly  situated.  It  has  a Penitentiary,  an  Asylum 
for  the  Deaf  and  Dumb,  and  a Lunatic  Hospital.  Popula- 
tion, 6,000. 

Cincinnati,  on  the  Ohio,  is  a large  manufacturing  city 
Its  plan  is  regular,  its  growth  rapid,  and  its  trade  extensive. 
Population,  60,000. 

Cleveland  is  a pleasant  and  flourishing  place.  Popula- 
tion, 8,000.  Chillicothe,  Marietta,  Zanesville,  are  growing 

places. 

Government.  (See  N.  E.  States.)  The  General  Assem- 
bly is  chosen  by  the  people. 

• Religion.  See  New  England  states,  in  general.  The 
Roman  Catholics  are  considerably  numerous.  There 
are  Theological  Schools  at  Cincinnati,  and  at  Ober- 
lin. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Pennsylvania  and  Delaware, 
in  general.)  Their  system  of  common  school  education 
has  not  gone  generally  into  practice.  There  are  colleges  at 
Athens  and  Oxford,  the  Western  Reserve  at  Hudson, 
also  Kenyon,  Franklin  Granville,  Marietta,  and  Cincinnati 
Colleges. 


46 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Remarks.  This  state  is  comparatively  new.  Its  growth  has 
been  rapid.  It  is  intersected  by  canals  and  railroads,  commu- 
nicating between  the  waters  of  the  lakes  and  the  Ohio  River. 
The  soil  is  excellent,  the  climate  healthy.  There  are  extensive 
coal  mines  and  salt  springs  in  this  state.  Its  commerce  and 
manufactures  are  rapidly  increasing. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Pennsylvania  bounded  ? 2.  What  are 
the  rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  Capital,  and  the 
chief  towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  What  is  said  of  the 
religious  sects  ? 8.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How 

is  Ohio  bounded?  10.  What  are  the  rivers?  11.  Productions? 
12.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 13.  What  is  the  gov- 

ernment? 14.  What  is  said  of  the  religious  denominations  ? 15.  Of 
the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  first  four  lessons  of  Part  II. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Penn- 
sylvania? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Ohio  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital?  Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Harrisburg  to  Paris  ? 


LESSON  XXI. 


MICHIGAN  AND  INDIANA. 

MICHIGAN. 

Boundaries.  Michigan  is  bounded  north  by  Lake  S., 
east  by  Lake  H.  and  C.,  south  by  O.,  I.,  and  W.,  west  by 
Lakes  M.  and  S. 

Rivers.  The  St.  Clair,  Detroit,  and  Grand  Rivers. 

Productions.  (See  Ohio.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Toicns.  Detroit  is  the  capital.  The 
streets  are  regular ; some  of  its  edifices  beautiful.  Popu 
lation,  12,000. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


47 


Munroe  City  is  a flourishing  manufacturing  place.  Pop- 
ulation, 4,000. 

Government.  (See  the  other  states.)  Suffrage  is  un- 
limited. 

Religion.  Same  as  Ohio. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Ohio.)  Colleges  at  Ann 
Arbor,  Spring  Arbor,  and  Marchal. 

Remarks.  This  state  is  remarkable  for  the  purity  of  its  cli- 
mate and  the  richness  of  its  soil.  Its  surface  is  generally  level ; 
on  the  margin  of  the  lakes,  flat  Some  parts  are  heavily  timbered,! 
Great  interest  is  taken  in  internal  improvements.  Iron,  lead,  and 
coal,  are  abundant. 


INDIANA. 

Boundaries.  Indiana  is  bounded  north  by  Lake  M.  and 
M.,  east  by  O.,  south  by  K.,  west  by  I. 

Rivers.  The  Ohio,  Wabash,  and  White  Rivers. 

Productions.  (See  Ohio,  generally.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Indianapolis,  the  capital,  is  a 
flourishing  town.  Population,  3,000. 

Vincennes,  once  the  capital,  is  beautifully  situated  upon 
tbe  margin  of  a prairie.  Population,  3,000. 

New  Albany  is  a place  where  steamboat  building  is 
largely  carried  on.  Population,  4,000. 

Jeffersonville,  Madison,  and  Harmony,  are  growing  places. 

Government.  (See  N.  E.  States.)  The  legispjftre, 
called  the  General  Assembly,  is  compsiSjgd  of  representa- 
tives and  senators,  chosen  by  the  people.  Suffrage  is 
unlimited. 

Religion.  Same  as  Ohio,  in  general.  This,  and  the 
other  western  states,  are  inadequately  supplied  with  means 
c.t  religious  instruction.  Indiana  Theological  Seminary 
at  South  Hanover. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Ohio.)  There  are  col- 
leges at  Bloomington,  South  Hanover,  and  Crawfordsville. 

Remarks.  This  state  abounds  in  extensive  prairies.  (Prairies 
are  tracts  of  level  land,  destitute  of  trees,  and  covered  with  rank 


48 


Particular  View. 


grass.)  More  than  ten  millions  of  dollars  have  recently  been 
appropriated  by  the  state  for  the  construction  of  railroads  and 
canals.  The  climate  and  soil  in  this  state  are  good.  Iron,  cop- 
per, and  coal,  are  found  here. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Michigan  bounded  ? 2.  What  waters 
nearly  surround  it ? 3.  What  are  the  productions?  4.  The  capital 

and  chief  towns  ? 5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  What  is  said  of 

the  religious  sects  ? 7.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

8.  How  is  Indiana  bounded  ? 9.  What  are  the  rivers  ? 10.  Produc- 
tions? 11.  Capital  and  chief  towns  ? 12.  What  is  the  government? 

13.  Describe  the  religious  sects.  14.  The  state  of  education  and 
morals. 

Review  the  four  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Michi- 
gan ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest? 

What  was  said  of  Indiana  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Detroit  to  Geneva? 


- — — 

LESSON  XXII. 

ILLINOIS  AND  MISSOURI. 

ILLINOIS. 

Boundaries.  Illinois  is  bounded  north  by  W.,  east  by 
].,  south  by  K.  and  M.,  west  by  M.  and  I.,  separated  by 
the  M.  River. 

Rivers.  The  Mississippi,  Ohio,  Wabash,  and  Illinois. 

Productions.  (See  Ohio.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Springfield  is  the  capital.  It 
is  a busy  and  beautiful  town,  upon  the  margin  of  an  ex- 
tensive prairie.  Population,  4,000. 

Alton  has  an  extensive  trade,  and  is  a growing  place 
Population,  5,000. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


49 


Chicago  has  grown  up  within  a few  years.  It  is  now 
the  principal  depot  for  imported  merchandise.  Population. 

-,000.  ‘ 

Government.  (See  the  preceding  states.)  The  General 
Assembly  is  composed  of  a Senate  and  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, chosen  by  the  people. 

Religion.  Very  similar  to  Ohio.  Public  worship, 
Sabbath  Schools,  and  the  institutions  of  religion  gener- 
ally, are  sustained  to  a considerable  extent  at  the  west 
by  means  of  Missionaries  from  the  older  churches  in  the 
N.  E.  and  Middle  States. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  Del.)  No  school  sys- 
tem exists  here.  There  are  colleges  at  Jacksonville,  Alton, 
and  Lebanon. 

Remarks.  The  surface  of  this  state  is  flat;  and  it  contains 
immense  prairies,  fed  by  numerous  wild  cattle  and  horses.  Illi- 
nois is  nearly  surrounded  by  navigable  -rivers  and  waters,  which 
afford  abundant  facilities  for  internal  navigation  and  improvements. 
Coal,  lead,  copper,  and  iron,  are  found  in  various  places.  There 
are  also  valuable  salt  springs  in  the  state. 


MISSOURI. 


Scene  on  the  Missouri. 


Boundaries.  Missouri  is  bounded  north  by  I.,  east  by 
I.  and  K.,  south  by  A.  west  by  the  I.  Territory. 

5 


50 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Rivers.  The  Mississippi,  Missouri,  and  Osage. 

Mountains.  The  Ozark. 

Productions.  (See  Ohio,  in  general.)  Some  cotton  is 
raised. 

Capital,  and  Chief  Towns.  Jefferson  City  is  the  capital. 
It  is  a pleasant  and  growing  place. 

St.  Louis  is  the  emporium  of  trade  for  all  the  Upper 
Mississippi.  It  has  large  manufacturing  interests.  Popu- 
lation, 20,000. 

St.  Charles  is  a busy  place,  with  3,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  N.  E.  States.)  The  right  of  suf- 
frage is  general,  among  the  whites. 

Religion.  Baptists  and  Methodists  are  nearly  equal. 
There  are  Episcopalians,  Presbyterians,  and  Catholics. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.)  There 
are  colleges  at  St.  Louis,  Perry,  Palmyra,  and  Columbia. 

Remarks.  In  the  back  parts  of  the  state,  the  land  is  hilly.  On 
the  rivers,  it  is  rich,  and  often  inundated.  This  state  abounds  in 
prairies.  It  is  rapidly  settling.  It  is  subject  to  earthquakes. 
There  are  rich  lead  mines  here,  yielding  more  than  20,000,000 
pounds  of  lead  annually,  and  employing  1,000  persons.  Slavery 
exists  here,  and  in  all  the  states  now  to  be  described. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Illinois  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the 

rivers?  3.  Productions?  4.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns ? 
5.  What  is  the  government  ? 6.  What  is  said  of  the  religious 

sects  ? 7.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 8.  How  is 
Missouri  bounded?  9.  What  rivers?  10.  Mountains?  11.  Pro- 
ductions? 12.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns?  13.  What 
is  the  government  ? 14.  Mention  the  religious  sects.  15.  What  is 
the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Illinois  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Missouri  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Si . Louis  to  Pekin  ? 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


51 


LESSON  XXIII. 

ARKANSAS,  TENNESSEE,  AND  KENTUCKY. 

ARKANSAS. 

Boundaries.  Arkansas  is  bounded  north  by  M.,  east  by 
T.  and  M.,  south  by  L.  and  T.,  west  by  the  I.  Territory. 

Rivers.  The  Mississippi,  Arkansas,  and  Red  Rivers. 

Mountains.  (See  Missouri.) 

Productions.  Cotton  is  the  staple.  In  other  respects, 
see  Ohio. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Little  Rock  is  the  capital. 
It  is  situated  on  the  Arkansas.  Its  location  is  healthy  and 
pleasant.  Population,  2,000. 

Arkansas  and  Batesville  are  the  principal  towns. 

Government.  (See  N.  E.  States.)  Suffrage,  however,  is 
limited  to  the  whites. 

Religion.  Baptists,  Methodists,  and  other  sects. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.) 

Remarks.  The  parts  of  this  state  bordering  on  the  rivers  are 
flat,  and  abound  in  prairies.  The  other  parts  are  hilly  and  barren. 
The  Hot  Springs  here  are  a great  curiosity.  Limestone,  coal, 
and  iron  ore,  are  abundant. 

TENNESSEE. 

Boundaries.  Tennessee  is  bounded  north  by  K.  and  V., 
east  by  N.  C.,  south  by  G.,  A.,  and  M.,  west  by  A. 

Rivers.  The  Mississippi,  Tennessee,  and  Cumberland. 

Mountains.  The  Cumberland  Mountains. 

Productions.  Cotton,  Indian  corn,  wheat,  hemp,  and 
tobacco.  (See  Arkansas.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Nashville  is  the  seat  of  gov- 
ernment. It  is  handsomely  located  on  the  Cumberland 


52 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


River.  The  houses  are  neat,  and  the  public  buildings 
splendid.  It  has  a large  trade,  and  6,500  inhabitants. 

Knoxville  and  Memphis  have  each  considerable  trade, 
and  about  3,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  N.  E.  States.)  Slavery  is  established 
here  by  law.  Suffrage  is  equal  among  the  whites. 

Religion.  Similar  to  the  neighboring  states,  in  most  of 
which  the  Methodist  and  Baptist  denominations  are  most 
numerous.  The  SouthWest  Theological  Seminary  (Pres- 
byterian) is  at  Maysville. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.)  There  are 
colleges  at  Nashville,  Greenville,  Knoxville,  and  Columbia. 

Remarks.  The  part  of  the  state  east  of  the  Cumberland 
Mountains'  is  hilly;  the  part  west  is  even.  There  are  several 
remarkable  caverns  in  the  state.  Some  are  8 or  10  miles  in  ex- 
tent, and  are  traversed  by  streams  of  water.  Gold,  iron,  salt,  and 
coal,  are  found  in  considerable  quantities  here 


KENTUCKY. 


Boundaries.  Kentucky  is  bounded  north  by  I.,  L,  and  O., 
east  by  V.,  south  by  T.,  west  by  M. 

Rivers.  The  Mississippi,  Ohio,  Tennessee,  and  Cum- 
berland. 

Mountains.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Productions.  Wheat,  hemp,  tobacco,  maize,  grapes, 
and  other  fruit. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Frankfort  is  the  capital.  It 
is  located  in  a deep  valley.  Its  public  buildings  are  a 
marble  State  House  and  a State  Penitentiary.  Popula- 
tion, 3,000. 

Louisville,  on  the  Ohio,  is  a large  manufacturing  and  com- 
mercial city.  Business  transactions  amount  to  $30,000,000 
annually.  Population,  20,000. 

Lexington  is  the  oldest  town  in  the  state.  Its  location 
is  beautiful ; the  streets  are  regular  and  spacious,  and  the 
public  buildings  elegant.  Population,  7,000. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


53 


Religion.  The  Baptists  and  Methodists  have  each  about 
300  societies.  The  Presbyterians,  of  all  classes,  have 
about  half  that  number.  There  are  also  Catholics,  Epis- 
copalians, and  Unitarians. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.)  There  are 
colleges  at  Lexington,  Danville,  Augusta,  Princetown,  and 
Bardstovvn. 

Remarks.  This  state  compares,  in  most  respects,  with  Ten- 
nessee. Some  parts  of  it  are  mountainous,  others  level  or  undu- 
lating. There  are  several  salt  springs  in  the  state.  Mammoth 
Cave  is  a great  curiosity.  One  of  its  apartments  covers  a surface 
of  several  acres,  without  a pillar  to  support  the  stupendous  arch. 
Iron,  coal,  salt,  and  lime,  are  found  here. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  Mow  is  Arkansas  bounded  ? 2.  What  are 

the  rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the 
capital  and  chief  towns?  6.  What  is  said  of  the  government? 
7.  Religious  seets  ? 8.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How  is 

Tennessee  bounded  ? 10.  What  are  the  rivers  ? 11.  Mountains  ? 

12.  Productions  ? 13.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 
14.  What  is  said  of  the  government  ? 15.  Religious  sects  ? 16.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 17.  How  is  Kentucky  bounded  ? 18.  What 
are  the  rivers?  19.  Mountains?  20.  Productions?  21.  What  are 
the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 22.  What  is  said  of  the  govern- 
ment ? 23.  Religious  sects  ? 24.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  four  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Tennes- 
see ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Kentucky?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Louisville  to  London  ? 


LESSON  XXIV. 

The  following  states  are  called  Southern  States : Vir- 
ginia, North  and  South  Carolinas,  Georgia,  Alabama,  Mis- 
sissippi, Louisiana,  Texas  and  Florida. 

5* 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


VIRGINIA  AND  NORTH  CAROLINA. 
VIRGINIA. 


University  of  Virginia. 


Boundaries.  Virginia  is  bounded  north  by  P.  and  M., 
east  by  M.  and  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  N.  C.  and  T., 
west  by  K.  and  O. 

Rivers.  The  Potomac,  James,  and  Roanoke.  Chesa- 
peake Bay. 

Mountains.  The  Alleghany. 

Productions.  Wheat,  Indian  corn,  cotton,  and  tobacco. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Richmond,  on  the  James, 
is  the  capital.  It  has  a very  picturesque  appearance. 
Most  of  the  houses  are  of  brick,  and  are  elegant.  The 
public  buildings  are  the  Capitol,  City  Hall,  State  Prison, 
and  State  Armory.  The  trade  is  extensive.  Population, 
23,000. 

Norfolk  is  a place  of  some  note,  but  is  now  rather  on  the 
decline.  Many  of  the  streets  are  thoroughly  paved  and 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


neat.  A Theatre,  -,uenaeum  and  Marine  Hospital,  are 
here.  Population,  10, 

Petersburg  is  a handsome  t^riving  place,  with  con- 
siderable trade.  Population,  ll,o%n 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion.  Similar  to  the  other  states  in  general,  l'irere 
are  three  Theol.  Seminaries;  one  of  the  Episcopal  church, 
in  Fairfax  Co.,  Virginia  Baptist  Seminary  at  Richmond, 
and  the  Union  Theol.  Sem.  in  Prince  Edward  Co. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.)  The  col- 
leges are,  William  and  Mary,  Hampden  Sidney,  and  the 
University  of  Virginia. 

Remarks.  The  land  in  Virginia  is  mountainous.  East  of  the 
Blue  Ridge  it  is  owned  by  planters,  and  cultivated  by  slaves. 
There  is  a natural  bridge  over  Cedar  Creek,  in  this  state,  70 
feet  long  and  250  feet  high.  Blowing  Cave  is  a great  curi- 
osity. The  air  issues  from  it  with  such  force,  as  to  prostrate  the 
grass  at  a distance  of  50  feet.  — Gold,  iron,  lead,  and  chalk,  are 
found  in  this  state. 


NORTH  CAROLINA. 

Boundaries.  North  Carolina  is  bounded  north  by  V., 
east  by  A.  and  P.  Sounds,  and  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by 
S.  C.,  west  by  T. 

Rivers.  The  Roanoke,  Neuse,  and  Cape  Fear  Rivers. 

Mountains.  The  Alleghany. 

Productions.  (See  Virginia.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Raleigh,  on  the  Neuse,  is 
the  capital.  The  State  House  is  a beautiful  granite  struc- 
ture. The  town  is  regular  and  handsome,  but  not  flourish- 
ing. Population,  2,500. 

Newbern,  on  the  Neuse,  is  the  largest  town  in  the  state. 
It  is  a place  of  considerable  trade.  Population,  4,200. 

Wilmington  is  the  first  town  in  the  state  in  point  of  trade. 
Population,  4,000. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion.  The  Methodists  and  Baptists  have  each 
about  20,000  church  members.  The  Presbyterians  have 


56 


p articular  view. 


about  half  that  number.  There  are  -£»lsC0Palians>  Mora* 
vians,  and  Catholics,  in  the  state 

Education  and  Moral ? (ScG  Maryland.)  Davidson 
College  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina. 

Remarxs.  The  sea-coast  is  level  and  sandy.  Back  from  the 
sea,  the  /and  is  hilly.  In  the  western  part,  it  is  mountainous.  The 
coast/s  lined  with  sand-banks  and  sounds,  which  makes  it  very 
difficult  to  approach  frem  the  sea.  There  are  valuable  gold 
mines  in  the  state,  yielding  annually  several  millions  of  dollars. 
Tar  and  turpentine  constitute  a large  part  of  the  exports  of  the 
state. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  Bound  Virginia.  2.  What  are  its  rivers? 
3.  Mountains  ? 4.  Productions  ? 5.  What  are  the  capital  and  the 
chief  towns?  6.  What  is  its  government?  7.  What  is  said  of  the 
religious  sects  ? 8.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How 

is  N.  Carolina  bounded  ? 10.  What  are  its  rivers  ? 11.  Mountains? 

12.  Productions  ? 13.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 
14.  What  is  its  government?  15.  What  was  said  of  the  religious 
sects?  16.  Of  tire  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  1.  Tell  what  you  know  of  Maine.  (First  bound  it,  and 
then  mention  each  particular.)  2.  Of  New  Hampshire.  3.  Massa- 
chusetts. 4.  Vermont.  5.  Rhode  Island.  6.  Connecticut.  7.  New 
York.  8.  New  Jersey.  9.  Delaware. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Vir- 
ginia? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  N.  Carolina  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Richmond  to  London  ? 


LESSON  XXV. 

SOUTH  CAROLINA  AND  GEORGIA. 

SOUTH  CAROLINA. 

Boundaries.  South  Carolina  is  bounded  north  by  N.  C.» 
south-east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south-west  by  G 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


Rivers.  The  Santee,  Great  Pedee,  and  Savannah. 

Productions.  Cotton,  rice,  tobacco,  indigo,  and  differ- 
ent kinds  of  grain. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Columbia  is  the  capital.  It 
occupies  an  elevated  plain.  It  has  a college  and  5,000 
inhabitants. 

Charleston,  once  the  seat  of  government,  is  a large, 
commercial  city.  It  is  regularly  built.  The  view  of  it 
from  the  water  is  fine.  The  principal  edifices  are  the 
Orphan  Asylum,  Circular  Church,  City  Hall,  and  the  Ex- 
change. Population,  30,000. 

Georgetown  has  considerable  commerce,  and  a popula- 
tion of  3,000. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion.  Very  similar  to  other  states.  There  are 
three  Theological  Seminaries ; the  Southern  Theological 
Seminary,  (Presbyterian,)  at  Columbia;  Furman  Co., 
(Baptist)  at  Fairfield  District,  and  Theological  Semi- 
nary, )Lutheran)  at  Lexington. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.)  There  are 
colleges  at  Columbia  and  Charleston. 

Remarks.  The  land  gradually  rises  from  a sandy  coast  to 
hilly,  and  thence  to  mountainous,  regions.  In  the  low  countries, 
fevers  prevail.  In  the  mountainous  parts,  it  is  healthy.  The  lower 
sections  of  the  state  are  inhabited  by  planters,  who  hold  large 
possessions  of  slaves ; the  western  and  mountainous  portions,  by  a 
population  who  till  their  own  land. 


GEORGIA. 

Boundaries.  Georgia  is  bounded  north  by  T.  and  N. 
C.,  east  by  S.  C.  and  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  F.,  and  west 
by  A. 

Rivers.  The  Altamaha,  Chatahoochee,  and  Savannah. 

Productions.  (See  South  Carolina.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Milledgeville  is  the  seat  of 
government.  It  has  some  trade,  a Capitol,  State  Prison, 
and  Arsenal.  Population,  2,700. 


58 


particular  view. 


Savannah,  the  largest  town  in  the  state,  is  situated  on  the 
Savannah  River.  It  has  an  elevated  and  beautiful  location. 
The  streets  and  squares  are  spacious,  the  buildings  splendid. 
It  has  a Theatre,  Exchange,  City  Hall,  and  Hospital.  Pop- 
ulation, 12,000. 

Augusta,  above  Savannah,  corresponds  with  it  in  most 
respects.  Population,  8,000. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion , Similar  to  the  neighboring  states,  in  most  of 
which  the  Methodist  and  Baptist  denominations  are  most 
numerous. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland,  in  general.) 
There  is  a university  at  Athens. 

Remarks.  The  face  of  the  country  resembles,  in  most  respects, 
that  of  N.  and  S.  Carolina.  There  are  numerous  islands  on  the 
coast,  producing  excellent  cotton.  In  the  southern  parts  of  the 
state,  there  are  extensive  swamps,  infested  with  a great  variety 
of  water  animals.  — Georgia  has  many  valuable  mines,  and 
numerous  mineral  springs. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  South  Carolina  bounded  ? 2.  What 
are  the  rivers?  3.  Productions?  4.  What  are  the  capital  and  the 
chief  towns?  5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  What  is  said  of  the 
religious  sects?  7.  Of  the  state  of  education  and  morals?  8.  How 
is  Georgia  bounded?  9.  What  are  the  rivers?  10.  Productions? 
11 . What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 12.  What  is  the  gov- 

ernment? 13.  What  is  said  of  the  religious  sects?  14.  State  of 
education  and  morals? 

Review.  Answer  the  questions  in  reference  to,  1.  Ohio.  2.  Mich- 
igan. 3.  Illinois.  4.  Indiana.  5.  Missouri.  6.  Arkansas.  7.  Ten- 
nessee. 8.  Kentucky. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  S. 
Carolina?  Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Georgia  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Savannah  to  Cairo  ? 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


59 


LESSON  XXVI. 

ALABAMA,  MISSISSIPPI,  AND  LOUISIANA. 

ALABAMA. 

Boundaries.  Alabama  is  bounded  north  by  T.,  east  by 
G.,  south  by  F.  and  the  Gulf  of  M.,  west  by  M. 

Rivers.  The  Mobile,  Alabama,  Tombigbee,  and  the 
Tennessee  Rivers. 

Productions.  (See  Georgia.)  Some  sugar  is  manufac- 
tured here. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Tuscaloosa  is  the  capital. 
Its  advantages  and  prospects  for  trade  are  good.  Popula- 
tion, 2,500. 

Mobile  is  the  principal  town  in  the  state.  Although  its 
location  is  unhealthy,  still  its  growth  has  been  rapid.  It  is 
the  chief  cotton  mart  of  the  south.  Population,  13,000. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion.  The  Baptists  and  Methodists  are  nearly  equal. 
There  are  also  Presbyterians,  Episcopalians,  and  Catholics. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland,  in  general.) 
There  is  a university  at  Tuscaloosa,  and  other  colleges  in 
the  state. 

Remarks.  A large  portion  of  Alabama  was  once  inhabited 
by  Indian  tribes.  Some  of  them  yet  remain  in  the  state.  The 
soil  is  generally  good,  though  much  of  it  is  flat  and  unhealthy. 
The  lowlands  produce  rice.  — Gold  is  found  in  some  parts  of 
the  state. 


MISSISSIPPI. 

Boundaries.  Mississippi  is  bounded  north  by  T.,  east  by 
A.,  south  by  the  Gulf  of  M.  and  L.,  west  by  L.  and  A. 

R ivers.  The  Mississippi  and  the  Pearl. 

Productions.  (See  Georgia.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Jackson  is  the  capital,  Its 


60 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


situation  is  central,  healthy,  and  pleasant.  The  public  build- 
ings are  the  Capitol  and  Penitentiary.  Population,  2,000. 

Natchez,  on  the  Mississippi,  is  the  largest  town  in  the 
state.  The  streets  are  spacious,  and  the  public  buildings 
beautiful.  It  was  recently  destroyed  by  a tornado.  It  has 
since  been  rebuilt.  Population,  10,000. 

Vicksburg  has  had  a rapid  growth,  and  has  a very  pic- 
turesque scenery.  The  trade  here  is  increasing.  Popula- 
tion, 5,000. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion.  Methodists,  Baptists,  Presbyterians,  Episcopa- 
lians, and  some  Catholics. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland,  in  general.) 

Remarks.  This  state  is  level,  healthy,  and  fertile.  It  is  still 
inhabited,  in  part,  by  native  tribes  of  Indians.  It  is  rapidly 
settling. 


LOUISIANA. 

Boundaries.  Louisiana  is  bounded  north  by  A.  and  M., 
east  by  M.  and  the  Gulf  of  M.,  south  by  the  Gulf,  west  by  T. 

Rivers.  The  Mississippi,  Red,  and  Sabine. 

Productions.  Cotton,  rice,  sugar,  and  grains. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  New  Orleans  is  the  capital,  and 
the  commercial  emporium  of  all  the  western  country.  The 
streets  cross  each  other  at  right  angles.  Various  nations 
and  languages  are  found  here.  The  Grand  Cathedral,  City 
Hall,  Custom  House,  and  Exchange,  are  splendid  edifices. 
The  location  and  climate  are  unhealthy.  Population, 
110,000. 

Natchitoches  is  made  up  of  a mixture  of  several  nations. 
It  is  a place  of  fashion,  and  has  some  trade.  Population, 
14,000. 

Alexandria  and  Munroe  are  places  of  note. 

Government.  (See  Tennessee.) 

Religion.  The  Roman  Catholics  are  the  prevailing  sect. 
Other  sects  are  numerous. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Maryland.)  There  are  col- 
leges at  Jackson,  St.  James,  and  Opelousas. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


61 


Remarks.  This  state  has  almost  every  variety  of  soil.  It 
abounds  in  swamps,  marshes,  prairies,  plains,  and  forests.  — The 
land  is  often  lower  than  the  Great  River.  It  is  protected  from 
inundations  by  artificial  banks. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Alabama  bounded?  2.  What  are  its 
rivers  ? 3.  Productions  ? 4.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief 
towns  ? 5.  What  is  the  government  ? 6.  Religious  sects  ? 7.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 8.  How  is  Mississippi  bounded  ? 9.  What 

are  the  rivers  ? 10.  Productions  ? 11.  What  are  the  capital  and  the 
chief  towns  ? 12.  Government  ? 13.  Religion  ? 14.  State  of  edu- 
cation and  morals  ? 15.  How  is  Louisiana  bounded  ? 16.  What  are 

its  rivers  ? 17.  Productions?  18.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief 
towns  ? 19.  What  is  the  government  ? 20.  Religion  ? 21.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  1.  Tell  what  you  know  of  Virginia.  2.  Maryland. 
3.  North  Carolina.  4.  South  Carolina.  5.  Georgia.  6.  Delaware. 
7.  Vermont.  8.  Maine. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Alaba- 
ma? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest? 

What  was  said  of  Louisiana  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  N.  Orleans  to  Constantinople? 


LESSON  XXVII. 

FLORIDA,  IOWA,  AND  WISCONSIN. 

FLORIDA. 

Boundaries.  Florida  is  bounded  north  by  A.  and  G.} 
east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  the  Gulf  of  M.,  west  by 
the  Gulf  of  M.  and  A. 

Rivers.  Apalachicola,  Suwanee,  and  St.  Johns. 

Productions.  (See  Louisiana.) 

Capital  and  Towns.  Tallahassee  is  the  capital.  It  has  a 
healthy  and  commanding  location  Ponulation.  3,000. 

6 


62 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


St.  Augustine,  on  the  A.  Ocean,  is  well  built,  has  a 
Navy  Yard  and  a fine  harbor.  Pensacola,  St.  Marks  and 
St.  Josephs  are  considerable  towns. 

Government.  Similar  to  the  other  Southern  States, 
Religioti.  Protestant  and  Roman  Catholic. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Louisiana.) 

IOWA. 

Boundaries.  Iowa  is  bounded  west  and  north  by  M. 
Ter.,  east  by  W.  and  I.,  and  south  by  M. 

Rivers.  Mississippi,  des  Moines,  and  Iowa. 
Productions.  (See  Illinois.) 

Capital , and  Towns.  Burlington  is  the  capital.  Du- 
buque and  Iowa  City. 

Government.  Same  as  the  Western  States  generally. 
Religion.  Protestant. 

Education  and  Morals.  A large  portion  of  the  state  is 
still  inhabited  by  native  Indians.  For  other  parts,  see 
Western  States  generally. 

WISCONSIN. 

Boundaries.  Wisconsin  is  bounded  north  by  M.,  east 
by  Lake  M.,  south  by  I.,  west  by  I.  and  M.  Territories. 
Rivers.  Mississippi,  Wisconsin,  and  Fox. 

Mountains.  Wisconsin  or  Porcupine. 

Productions.  In  the  southern  part,  same  as  Michigan 
Capital  and  Towns.  Madison  is  the  capital.  Mil 
waukie. 

Religion.  (See  Iowa.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Iowa.) 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Florida  bounded?  2.  Rivers? 
3.  Productions?  4.  Capital  and  towns?  5.  Government? 
6.  Religion  ? 7.  Education  and  Morals  ? — 8.  Bound  Iowa. 

9.  Rivers  ? 10.  Productions?  11.  Capital  and  towns  ? 12.  Gov- 

ernment? 13.  Religion?  14.  Education  and  Morals? — 15  Bound 
Wisconsin.  16.  Rivers?  17.  Mountains?  18.  Productions? 
19.  Capital  and  towns?  20.  Government?  21.  Religion'1 
22  Education  and  Morals? 

Review  the  first  seven  lessons  of  Part  I. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


63 


LESSON  XXVIII, 
TERRITORIES. 

The  Territories  are  districts  of  country  under  the  pro- 
tection and  government  of  the  United  States. 

INDIAN  TERRITORY. 

This  region  of  country  is  assigned  by  government  to 
Indian  tribes,  that  have  been  removed  from  the  Southern 
States.  It  lies  west  of  Arkansas  and  Missouri,  and  be- 
tween the  Red  and  Platte  Rivers.  The  Indians  inhabit- 
ing this  territory  are  the  Choctaws,  Chickasaws,  Creeks, 
Cherokees,  Senecas,  Shawnees,  Quapaws,  and  Osages. 
Some  of  them  are  native  tribes.  Considerable  progress 
has  been  made  towards  their  civilization.  There  are 
several  missionary  stations,  and  some  trading  posts,  in 
this  territory. 

MISSOURI  TERRITORY. 

This  territory  is  mostly  included  between  the  Indian 
Territory  and  British  America.  It  abounds  in  rivers  and 
mountains.  Many  native  tribes  of  Indians  are  found  here. 
They  subsist  mostly  by  fishing  and  hunting.  They  exist 
in  an  uncivilized  state,  and  shun  all  intercourse  with  the 
whites. 

OREGON  TERRITORY. 

Oregon  Territory  lies  between  the  Rocky  Mountains 
and  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It  is  inhabited  by  various  tribes 
of  Indians,  for  the  most  part  in  an  uncivilized  state. 
Here  are  several  important  trading  posts.  The  traffic  is 
principally  in  fur.  Astoria  is  the  chief  town.  The  prin- 
cipal river  is  the  Columbia  River. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  are  territories  ? 2.  Where  is  the  In- 
dian Territory  ? 3.  To  whom  assigned  ? 4.  Mention  the  tribes 

that  inhabit  it.  5.  What  can  you  say-mf  them  ? 6.  Where 

is  Missouri  Territory  ? 7.  By  whom  inhabited?  8.  By  what  do 

they  subsist?  9.  What  else  is  said  of  them  ? 10.  Where  is  Ore- 
gon Territory  ? 11.  By  whom  inhabited  ? 12.  What  their  con- 

dition ? 13.  What  article  of  traffic  ? 14.  Chief  town  ? 15.  River? 

REVIEW.  1.  How  are  the  United  States  bounded?  2.  Wha*.  lakes,  gulfs,  and 
sounds  ? 3.  Mention  the  rivers.  4.  The  productions  of  the  N.  E.  Slates.  5.  Of 
the  Middle  and  Western  States.  6.  Of  the  Southern  States.  7.  Mention  the  cap- 
ital of  each  stale.  8.  The  government  of  each  state.  9 Mention  the  general 
state  of  education  and  morals  in  New  England.  10.  In  the  Middle  States.  11.  In 
the  Southern  Slates. 


64 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


LESSON  XXIX. 


BRITISH  AMERICA. 

This  region  of  country  lies  between  the  U.  S.  and  the  A. 
and  A.  Oceans.  It  is  a region  of  bays,  lakes,  rivers,  and 
forests.  It  is  subject  to  the  Gov.  of  England. 

CANADA. 

Canada  is  the  portion  of  this  vast  territory  that  lies  next 
to  the  United  States. 

The  St.  Lawrence  is  the  principal  river. 

Productions.  Substantially  the  same  as  in  New  Eng- 
land, except  that  Indian  corn  is  not  generally  cultivated 
here. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Kingston  is  now  the  capital. 
It  is  well  built,  on  the  margin  of  Lake  Ontario.  It  has 
5,000  inhabitants. 

Montreal,  on  the  St.  Lawrence,  is  a place  of  great  trade. 
The  Grand  Cathedral  here  is  a splendid  temple.  It  covers 
nearly  an  acre  of  ground.  This  city  occupies  an  island  in 
the  river.  The  population  is  40,000. 

Quebec,  on  the  St.  Lawrence,  is  built  on  a promontory 
at  the  confluence  of  St.  Charles  with  the  St.  Lawrence 
Rivers.  It  is  divided  into  Upper  and  Lower  towns.  Popu- 
lation, 30,000. 

Government.  Canada  is  dependent  on  England. 

Religion.  The  Catholics  are  about  three  times  as  numer- 
ous as  the  Protestants. 

Education  and  Morals.  Both  are  very  much  neglected 
here.  All  their  common  schools  are  supported  by  the 
English  government.  The  Catholics  have  several  colleges 
and  seminaries. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


63 


NEW  BRUNSWICK 

New  Brunswick  lies  between  the  River  and  Gulf  of  St. 
Lawrence  and  Maine. 

Rivers.  St.  John  and  St.  Francis. 

Productions.  (See  Maine,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Toivns.  Fredericton  is  the  capital, 
Population,  3,000.  New  Castle,  St.  John,  and  St.  An- 
drew’s, are  the  principal  towns. 

Government.  (See  Canada.) 

Religion.  Protestant  and  Catholic. 

State  of  Education  and  3Iorals.  Poor ; better,  however, 
than  in  Canada. 


NOVA  SCOTIA 

Nova  Scotia  lies  between  the  Bay  of  F.  and  the  A. 
Ocean. 

Productions.  (See  Maine,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Halifax  is  the  capital. 
Population,  10,000. 

Liverpool  and  Lunenburg  are  important  places. 

Government . (See  Canada.) 

Religion.  About  one  third  of  the  population  are  Cath- 
olics. The  Protestants  are  Baptists,  Presbyterians,  Epis 
copalians,  and  Methodists. 

Education  and  Morals . (See  New  Brunswick.) 

NEWFOUNDLAND. 

Newfoundland  lies  between  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 
and  the  A.  Ocean. 

The  inhabitants  are  mostly  employed  in  fishing,  for 
which  the  Grand  Banks,  near  the  coast,  afford  a fine  op 
portunity.  The  land  is  much  neglected. 

Capital.  St.  John’s.  It  has  a good  harbor  and  somi 
trade.  The  houses  are  mostly  low  and  mean. 

6* 


66 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Government,  Religion,  Education,  and  Morals.  (See 
Nova  Scotia.) 

QUESTIONS.  1.  Where  does  British  America  lie?  2.  With 
what  does  it  abound  ? 3.  Mention  some  of  them.  4.  To  what  is  it 

subject?  5.  Where  is  Canada?  6.  What  is  the  principal  river? 
7.  What  are  the  productions  ? 8.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief 

towns?  9.  What  is  said  of  the  government?  10.  Religion?  11.  Of 
the  state  of  education  and  morals?  12.  Where  is  New  Brunswick? 
13.  What  river?  14.  What  are  the  productions  ? 15.  What  are  the 
capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 16.  What  is  the  government  ? 

17.  What  is  the  religion?  18.  The  state  of  education  and  morals? 
19.  Where  does  Nova  Scotia  lie?  20.  What  are  the  productions? 
21.  The  capital  and  the  chief  towns?  22.  What  is  the  government? 
23.  Religion?  24.  State  of  education  and  morals?  25.  Where 
does  Newfoundland  lie  ? 26.  How  are  the  inhabitants  generally 

employed  ? 27.  What  is  the  capital  ? 28.  What  is  the  govern- 
ment ? 29.  Religion  ? 30.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XXX. 

NEW  BRITAIN. 

This  is  a large  tract  of  territory,  lying  between  Canada 
and  the  A.  and  A.  Ocean.  It  is  nominally  owned  by  Eng- 
land. It  is  inhabited  by  numerous  tribes  of  Indians.  They 
subsist  chiefly  by  fishing  and  hunting.  There  are,  at  sev- 
eral points,  important  trading  posts.  Fur  is  the  principal 
article  of  traffic.  This  is  a cold  and  broken  region.  The 
Esquimaux  Indians  inhabit  the  northern  parts. 


RUSSIAN  AMERICA. 

Russian  America  lies  between  the  P.  and  A.  Oceans, 
west  of  N.  Britain.  It  is  a broken  and  barren  region.  It 
belongs  to  the  Russian  empire.  It  is  inhabited  mostly  by 
tribes  of  Indians.  There  are  a few  Russians  in  the  country 
engaged  in  the  fur  trade. 


NORTH  AMERICA.  67 


GREENLAND. 

Greenland  lies  between  Baffin’s  Bay  and  the  A.  and  A. 
Oceans.  It  is  a cold  and  barren  region.  It  belongs  to  the 
crown  of  Denmark.  The  inhabitants  are  dwarfish  and  stu- 
pid. They  live  mostly  in  subterranean  huts,  built  by  the 
women,  without  chimneys  or  furniture.  They  subsist  on 
fish  and  oil,  and  live  most  of  the  time  in  idleness.  They 
have,  in  general,  no  laws ; in  fact,  no  government,  except 
custom. 

The  Moravians  have  important  missionary  establishments 
here. 


ICELAND. 

This  is  an  island  in  the  A.  Ocean,  near  G.  It  is  inhab- 
ited by  an  enlightened  and  a religious  people.  The 
religion  is  Lutheran,  or  the  sentiments  inculcated  by  the 
great  reformer.  The  celebrated  volcano,  Mount  Hecla, 
is  in  this  island.  The  hot  springs  here  are  very  remarkable. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  Where  does  New  Britain  lie?  2.  By  whom 
is  it  owned?  3.  By  whom  inhabited?  4.  By  what  do  they  sub- 
sist? 5.  What  article  of  traffic?  6.  What  is  said  of  this  region? 
7.  What  are  the  rivers?  8.  Gulfs,  bays,  and  lakes?  9.  Where  is 
Russian  America?  10.  To  what  empire  does  it  belong?  11.  By 
whom  inhabited  ? 12.  What  is  the  trade  ? 13.  Where  is  Green- 

land ? 14.  To  what  crown  does  it  belong?  15.  What  is  said  of  the 
inhabitants  ? 16.  Of  their  government  ? 17.  Of  the  missionary 

stations  ? 18.  Where  is  Iceland  ? 19.  What  is  said  of  the  inhab- 
itants ? 20.  What  is  their  religion?  21.  What  volcano  there? 

22.  What  other  matters  of  interest  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


68 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


LESSON  XXXI. 

TEXAS,  MEXICO,  AND  GUATEMALA. 

TEXAS. 

Now  one  of  the  U.  S.  (184.6) 

Boundaries.  Texas  is  bounded  north  by  the  I.  Territory, 
east  by  L.  and  the  I.  T.,  south  by  the  Gulf  of  M.,  west  by  M. 

Rivers.  The  Colorado,  Brazos,  and  Rio  del  Norte. 

Productions.  Cotton,  sugar,  rice,  tobacco,  and  grain 
of  various  kinds. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Houston  was  the  former  cap- 
ital. It  is  a place  of  considerable  trade.  Population,  3,500. 

Austin  is  now  the  seat  of  government.  Bexar,  or  Bejar, 
and  Galveston,  are  the  principal  towns. 

Government.  Republic. 

Religion.  Protestant  and  Catholic. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Low.  Society  is  here 
in  a very  confused  state. 


MEXICO. 

Boundaries.  Mexico  is  bounded  north  by  the  U.  S.,  east 
by  the  U.  S.,  T.,  and  the  Gulf  of  M.,  south  by  G.  and  the 
P.  Ocean,  west  by  the  P.  Ocean. 

Rivers.  Colorado  and  Rio  del  Norte. 

Mountains.  The  Cordilleras  of  Mexico,  called,  as  they 
pass  into  the  United  States,  the  Rocky  Mountains. 

Productions.  (See  Texas.)  Also  indigo  and  cochineal. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Mexico,  the  capital,  is  one 
of  the  most  splendid  cities  in  the  world.  The  streets  are 
regular,  spacious,  and  elegant.  The  houses  are  beautiful. 
The  public  edifices  surpass  those  of  any  other  American 
city.  It  is  elevated  7,000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
Population,  200,000. 

Puebla  resembles  Mexico  in  many  respects.  Popula- 
tion, 75,000.  Guadalaxara  has  60,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  Republican. 


NORTH  AMERICA. 


69 


Religion.  Roman  Catholic. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Poor.  There  is  but 
little  knowledge  or  correct  principle  diffused  among  the 
mass  of  the  people. 

Remarks.  On  the  eastern  and  western  coasts,  the  land  is  low 
and  level  As  you  advance  towards  the  interior,  it  gradually  rises 
to  an  elevation  of  7 or  8,000  feet  above  the  sea.  — The  climate, 
soil,  and  productions,  vary  with  the  elevation  of  the  country.  — 
The  gold  and  silver  mines  of  Mexico  are  the  richest  in  the  world. 
The  land  often  yields  two  crops  a year. 

. GUATIMALA. 

Boundaries.  Guatimala  is  bounded  north  by  M.  and  the 
C.  Sea,  east  by  the  C.  Sea,  and  south-west  by  the  P.  Ocean. 

Lake.  Lake  Nicaragua. 

Mountains.  (See  Mexico.) 

Productions.  (See  Mexico.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Guatimala  is  the  capital. 
It  has  a delightful  location  and  climate.  The  streets  are 
neat  and  spacious  : but  the  houses  are  low,  on  account  of 
frequent  earthquakes.  Population,  50,000. 

Leon  and  Cartago  are  important  places. 

Government.  (See  Mexico.) 

Religion.  (See  Mexico.) 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  (See  Mexico.) 

Remarks.  Guatimala  resembles  Mexico  in  many  respects. 
It  has  the  same  peculiarities  of  climate,  soil,  and  surface.  This 
country  has  many  volcanoes.  In  some  parts,  logwood  and  ma- 
hogany are  produced,  of  the  best  quality. 


THE  WEST  INDIES. 

This  is  the  name  of  a large  group  of  islands  situated 
between  North  and  South  America.  When  they  were  first 
discovered  by  Columbus,  they  were  supposed  to  form  a 
part  of  the  East  India  Islands.  The  climate,  in  summer,  is 
hot  and  unhealthy ; in  winter,  it  is  delightful.  These  islands 


70 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


are  subject  to  earthquakes,  tempests,  and  tornadoes.  With 
the  exception  of  Hayti,  they  are  owned  by  European  powers. 
The  productions  of  the  West  Indies  are  nearly  the  same  as 
those  of  Mexico  and  Guatimala.  The  religion  is  Roman 
Catholic  and  Protestant. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Texas  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  What  are  the  productions  ? 4.  What  are  the  capital  and 

the  chief  towns?  5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  Religion? 
7.  State  of  education  and  morals?  8.  How  is  Mexico  bounded? 
9.  What  rivers?  10.  Mountains?  11.  What  are  the  capital  and 
the  chief  towns?  12.  What  is  the  government?  13.  Religion? 
14.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 15.  How  is  Guatimala  bounded  ? 

16.  What  are  the  mountains?  17.  What  the  productions?  18.  What 
are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 19.  Government  ? 20.  Reli- 

gion ? 21.  State  of  education  and  morals?  22.  Where  are  the 
West  Indies?  23.  To  what  kingdoms  do  they  belong?  24.  What 
are  the  productions?  25.  What  is  the  religion  of  these  islands? 

Review  the  four  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  (Mention  the  states  that  lie  on  the  Atlantic 
Ocean.  What  river  flows  into  the  Atlantic  ? What  river  flows 
into  the  Arctic  Ocean  ? What  states  lie  on  the  Ohio  River?  What 
states  lie  on  the  Mississippi  River?  What  states  lie  on  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico?  What  bays,  gulfs,  and  sounds,  on  the  Atlantic  coast? 
What  capes  ? What  lakes  in  the  United  States?  What  ranges  of 
mountains  ? Mention  the  principal  towns  on  the  St.  Lawrence. 
Hudson.  Delaware.  Potomac.  Savannah.  Ohio.) 


LESSON  XXXII. 

SOUTH  AMERICA. 


Boundaries.  S.  America  is  bounded  north  by  the  C. 
Sea,  east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  the  S.  Ocean,  west 
by  the  P.  Ocean. 

Islands.  The  West  Indies,  Falkland  Isles,  Terra  del 
Fuego,  and  the  Isle  of  Chiloe. 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 


71 


Capes  Cape  Vela,  Cape  St.  Roque,  St.  Maria,  Cape 
Horn,  Cape  Blanco. 

Isthmus  of  Darien. 

Mountains.  The  Andes  and  Geral  Mountains. 

Plains.  There  are  immense  plains  or  pampas  in  the 
region  of  the  great  rivers. 

Sea.  The  Caribbean. 

Bays.  St.  Matthew’s  Bay  and  the  Bay  of  Panama. 

Strait.  Strait  of  Magellan. 

Lakes.  Maracaybo  and  Titicaca. 

Rivers.  Magdalena,  Orinoco,  Amazon  and  its  branches, 
the  St.  Francisco,  and  Rio  de  la  Plata. 

Minerals.  Gold  in  great  abundance,  silver,  copper, 
quicksilver,  and  diamonds. 

Divisions.  South  America  is  divided  into  N.  G.,  V.,  E., 
G.,  B.,  P.,  B.,  P.,  U.,  U.  P.,  C.,  and  P.  (The  pupil  need 
not  commit  these  names.) 

Inhabitants.  Native  Indians,  Negroes,  and  European 
races. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  South  America  bounded?  2.  What 
islands  near  ? 3.  What  capes?  4.  What  isthmus?  5.  What  moun- 

tains ? 6.  Plains  ? 7.  What  sea  ? 8.  Bays?  9.  Strait?  10.  Lakes? 
11.  Rivers?  12.  Minerals?  13.  Divisions'1  14.  Inhabitants? 

Review  Lessons  XIII.  and  XIV. 


LESSON  XXXIII. 

NEW  GRENADA,  VENEZUELA,  AND  EQUADOR. 
NEW  GRENADA. 

Boundaries.  New  Grenada  is  bounded  north  by  the  C. 
Sea,  east  by  V.,  south  by  E.,  west  by  the  P.  Ocean. 


7 2 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Rivers.  Magdalena,  and  the  branches  of  the  Orinoco. 

Mountains.  The  Andes. 

Productions.  (See  Mexico.)  Also  coffee  and  plantains. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Bogota  is  the  capital.  It 
has  many  elegant  buildings  and  churches.  The  latter  are 
resplendent  with  gold  and  jewels.  Population,  40,000. 

The  other  principal  towns  are  Carthagena  and  Panama. 

Government.  Republican  in  form. 

Religion.  Roman  Catholic. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Poor.  Education  is 
confined  principally  to  the  higher  classes. 

Remarks.  This  country  is  mountainous,  and  the  climate 
various,  corresponding  with  that  of  the  hottest  and  coldest  lat- 
itudes. The  soil  and  productions  are  various  as  the  climate.  ■ 
Gold,  silver,  and  emeralds,  are  found  here  in  abundance. 


VENEZUELA. 

Boundaries.  Venezuela  is  bounded  north  by  the  C.  Sea, 
east  by  G.  and  B.,  south  by  B.,  west  by  N.  G. 

Rivers.  The  Orinoco,  and  the  branches  of  the  Amazon. 

Mountains.  Chains  of  the  Andes  extend  into  this 
country. 

Productions.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Caraccas  is  the  capital.  Its 
location  is  elevated.  Its  commerce  is  extensive.  It  has  been 
reduced  in  population  about  one  half,  by  reason  of  earth- 
quakes. Population,  48,000. 

Maracaybo  and  Valencia  have  each  about  18,000  inhab- 
itants. 

Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  Venezuela  is  a vast  plain,  covered  with  luxuriant 
grass  and  numerous  herds  of  cattle.  The  soil  is  rich,  and  the 
jlimate.agreeable. 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 


73 


EQUADOR. 

Boundaries.  Equador  is  bounded  north  by  N.  G.,  east 
by  B.,  south  by  B.  and  P.,  west  by  the  P.  Ocean. 

Rivers.  The  Amazon  and  its  branches. 

Mountains.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Productions.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Quito  is  the  capital.  Its 
elevation  above  the  ocean  is  nearly  10,000  feet.  It  has 
perpetual  spring.  Volcanic  eruptions  and  earthquakes  are 
frequent.  Population,  70,000. 

Guayaquil  and  Riobamba  have  each  about  22,000  in- 
habitants. 

Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  ami  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  Equador  is  traversed  by  ridges  of  the  Andes.  The 
climate  of  the  valleys  is  that  of  perpetual  spring.  Seed-time  and 
harvest  are  always  present.  The  hues  of  spring  and  of  autumn 
are  blended  in  the  same  landscape.  Mines  producing  gold, 
silver,  lead,  quicksilver,  copper,  and  precious  stones,  are  found 
here. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  New  Grenada  bounded  ? 2.  What 
are  the  rivers  ? 3.  What  are  the  mountains?  4.  Productions?  What 
are  the  capital  and  towns?  5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  Reli- 
gion? 7.  State  of  education  and  morals?  8.  How  is  Venezuela 
Sounded?  9.  What  are  the  rivers  ? 10.  What  are  the  mountains? 

11.  Productions  ? Capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 12.  What  is  the  gov- 

ernment? 13.  Religion?  14.  State  of  education  and  morals? 
15.  How  is  Equador  bounded  ? 16.  What  are  its  rivers  ? 17.  What 

are  its  mountains  ? 18.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 

19.  What  is  the  government?  20.  Religion?  21.  State  of  educa- 
tion and  morals  ? 

Review  the  first  six  lessons  of  Part  I. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  New 
Grenada  ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Venezuela?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
goincr  from  Carthagena  to  St.  Petersburg  ? 


74 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


PERU,  BRAZIL,  AND  GUIANA. 

PERU. 

Boundaries.  Peru  is  bounded  north  by  E.,  east  by  B. 
and  B.,  south  by  B.  and  the  P.  Ocean,  west  by  the  P. 
Ocean. 

Rivers.  (See  EqUador.) 

Mountains.  (See  Equador.) 

Productions.  (See  Equador.)  Also  Peruvian  bark. 
Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Lima  is  the  capital.  The 
streets  are  handsome,  but  the  houses  are  low.  Like  nearly 
all  the  Spanish  cities,  it  has  a square  in  the  centre,  where 
the  streets  terminate,  and  the  public  buildings  are  located. 
Population,  85,000. 

Cusco  and  Arequipa  are  places  of  considerable  note. 
Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  Peru  has  almost  every  variety  of  climate  and  soil. 
In  the  low  country,  the  climate  is  hot,  and  the  land  barren.  In 
the  elevated  parts,  the  climate  is  temperate,  and  the  soil  good. 
The  tops  of  the  mountains  are  covered  with  perpetual  snow. 
Peru  is  rich  in  mines  of  gold,  silver,  copper,  lead,  quicksilver,  &c. 


BRAZIL. 

Boundaries.  Brazil  is  bounded  north-east  by  the  A. 
Ocean,  south-east  by  the  A.  Ocean,  south-west  by  U.,  P., 
B.,  and  P.,  north-west  by  E.,  V.,  and  G. 

Rivers.  Amazon  and  its  branches,  and  St.  Francisco. 
Mountains.  This  vast  country  is  traversed  by  numerous 
ranges  of  mountains,  that  take  different  names  in  differ- 
ent parts.  The  principal  ridge  is  called  Serra  do  Mar. 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 


75 


Productions.  Cotton,  coffee,  sugar,  tobacco,  and  grains. 
(See  New  Grenada.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Rio  Janeiro,  the  capital,  has 
a fine  harbor,  and  is  elegantly  built,  with  broad,  straight, 
and  well-paved  streets.  The  public  buildings  and  squares 
are  splendid.  The  population,  made  up  of  various  nations, 
amounts  to  155,000. 

San  Salvador  is  a splendid  city.  Population,  120,000. 

Pernambuco  has  a population  of  60,000. 

Government.  A limited  monarchy.  Till  recently,  Bra- 
zil was  subject  to  Portugal. 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  This  vast  country  is  remarkable  for  its  mountains, 
plains,  and  forests.  The  woods  abound  in  aromatic  plants.  The 
climate  is  healthy,  the  soil  fertile,  and  the  scenery  grand.  Nu- 
merous herds  of  wild  cattle  rove  in  these  forests.  Silver,  gold, 
emeralds,  crystal,  and  diamonds,  are  found  here. 


GUIANA. 


Boundaries.  Guiana  is  bounded  north  by  the  A.  Ocean, 
east  and  south  by  B.,  west  by  V. 

This  country  is  made  up  of  provinces  subject  to  Euro- 
pean powers.  The  English,  Dutch,  and  French,  have  pos- 
sessions here.  The  productions  are  the  same,  substantially, 
as  those  of  New  Grenada.  Religion  is  Catholic  and  pagan. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Peru  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  Capital  and  the  chief 
towns  ? 5.  What  is  the  government  ? 6.  Religion  ? 7.  State  of 
education  and  morals?  8.  How  is  Brazil  bounded  ? 9.  What  are  the 

rivers?  10.  Mountains?  11.  Productions?  Capital  and  the  chief 
towns?  12.  What  is  the  government?  13.  Religion?  14.  State 
of  education  and  morals?  15.  How  is  Guiana  bounded?  16.  By 
whom  is  it  owned?  17.  What  are  the  productions?  18.  What  is 
the  religion  ? 

Review  the  remainder  of  Part  I. 


76 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Peru  ? 
VVhere  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Brazil  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Rio  Janeiro  to  Lisbon  ? 


LESSON  XXXV. 

BOLIVIA,  UNITED  PROVINCES,  AND  CHILL 
BOLIVIA. 

Boundaries.  Bolivia  is  bounded  north  by  P.  and  B., 
east  by  B.,  south  by  the  U.  P.,  west  by  the  P.  Ocean  and  P. 

Rivers.  Branches  of  the  Amazon  and  La  Plata. 

Mountains.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Productions.  (See  New  Grenada,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Toicns.  La  Plata  is  the  capital.  It  is 
not  a place  of  much  note. 

Potosi  is  one  of  the  largest  towns  in  the  country.  The 
houses  are  externally  neat,  but  internally  filthy.  The 
suburbs  are  mostly  in  ruins. 

La  Paz  lies  in  a deep  ravine,  environed  by  lofty  moun- 
tains. It  is  a place  of  great  commercial  interest. 

Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  The  surface  of  this  country  is  mountainous,  its 
soil  and  climate  variable.  The  silver  mines  of  Potosi  are  the 
richest  in  the  world. 

UNITED  PROVINCES. 

Boundaries.  The  United  Provinces  are  bounded  north 
by  B.,  east  by  P.,  and  bv  U.,  south  by  the  A.  Ocean  and  P* 
west  by  C 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 


77 


Rivers.  The  La  Plata  and  Colorado. 

3Iountains.  The  Andes. 

Productions.  Wheat,  corn,  tobacco,  sugar-cane,  and  all 
kinds  of  tropical  fruits. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Buenos  Ayres,  on  the  La 
Plata,  is  the  capital.  Its  location  is  healthy  and  command- 
ing, and  the  streets  regular  and  well  paved.  The  houses 
are  low,  and  mostly  of  brick ; they  are  generally  surrounded 
by  a garden.  The  public  squares  and  edifices  are  numer- 
ous and  grand.  Population,  80,000. 

Cordova  is  a commercial  and  manufacturing  city.  It 
has  12,000  inhabitants. 

San  Juan  has  an  extensive  trade,  and  16,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  3Iorals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  This  country  has  a scattered  population.  Most  of 
the  inhabitants  are  native  Indians.  The  southern  parts  spread 
out  into  prairies  or  pampas,  covered  with  luxuriant  grass  and 
plants,  fed  by  numerous  herds  of  wild  horses  and  cattle.  Gold, 
gems,  and  emeralds,  are  found  here. 


CHILI. 

Boundaries.  Chili  is  bounded  north  by  B.,  east  by  the 
U.  P.  and  P.,  south  and  west  by  the  P.  Ocean. 

3Iountains.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Productions.  Cotton,  sugar,  hemp,  grains,  and  tropical 
fruits. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Santiago  is  the  capital.  It 
is  situated  in  an  extensive  valley.  The  houses  are  low,  on 
account  of  earthquakes,  that  are  common  there.  Popula- 
tion, 55,000. 

Valparaiso  is  the  port  of  Santiago,  and  has  20,000  in- 
habitants. Conception  has  14,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

7 * 


78 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  Chili  is  situated  between  the  Andes  and  the  ocean. 
The  climate  is  healthy  and  delightful.  This  country  is  subject 
to  earthquakes  and  frequent  volcanic  eruptions.  It  has  many  rich 
Times  of  gold,  silver,  copper,  and  tin. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Bolivia  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  the  chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 7.  Religion  ? 

8.  Education  and  morals?  9.  How  are  the  United  Provinces 
bounded?  10.  What  are  the  rivers?  11.  Mountains?  12.  Pro- 
ductions ? 13.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns?  14.  What 

is  the  government?  15.  Religion?  16.  Education  and  morals? 
17.  How  is  Chili  bounded?  18.  What  are  the  mountains?  19.  Pro- 
ductions ? 20.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns?  21.  What 
is  the  government?  22.  Religion  ? 23.  Education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  1.  Where  do  the  United  States  lie?  2.  What  is  the 
government  of  the  United  States?  3.  What  is  the  religion? 
4.  Describe  the  District  of  Columbia.  5.  Name  each  particular,  in 
respect  to  Maine.  6.  New  Hampshire.  7.  Vermont.  8.  Massa- 
chusetts. 9.  Rhode  Island.  10.  Connecticut.  11.  New  York. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Bolivia  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  the  United  Provinces  ? Where  is  each  town  sit- 
uated ? Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters. 
What  else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you 
sail,  in  going  from  Buenos  Ayres  to  Montreal  ? 


LESSON  XXXYI. 

PARAGUAY,  URUGUAY,  AND  PATAGONIA. 

PARAGUAY. 

Boundaries.  Paraguay  is  bounded  north  and  east  by  B., 
south  and  west  by  the  U.  P. 

Rivers.  The  Paraguay  and  Parana. 

Productions.  Tea,  tobacco,  grain,  and  cattle. 


SOUTH  AMERICA. 


79 


Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Assumption  is  the  capital. 
Population,  7,000.  Other  towns  are  Villa  Rica  and  Con- 
ception. 

Government.  Absolute  monarchy. 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  The  soil  here  is  good,  the  climate  healthy.  The 
plains  abound  in  numerous  herds  of  cattle.  A gum  is  produced 
here,  from  which  India  rubber  is  made. 


URUGUAY. 

Boundaries.  Uruguay  is  bounded  north  by  B.,  east  by 
the  A.  Ocean,  south  by  the  La  Plata,  west  by  the  U.  P. 

Rivers.  The  La  Plata  and  Uruguay. 

Productions.  (See  United  Provinces.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Monte  Video,  on  the  La 
Plata,  is  the  capital.  It  is  badly  built,  but  has  some  trade. 
Population,  11,000.  Other  towns  are  Rio  Grande  and 
Colonia. 

Government.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Religion.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  New  Grenada.) 

Remarks.  This  is  a small  republic,  formerly  a part  of  Brazil. 
The  climate  and  soil  are  good.  It  exports  a large  quantity  of 
hides. 

PATAGONIA. 

Patagonia  lies  at  the  southern  extremity  of  South  Ameri- 
ca, between  the  A.  and  P.  Oceans.  It  is  inhabited  mostly 
by  savage  tribes.  But  little  is  known  of  them.  They  have 
been  represented  as  of  gigantic  stature. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Paraguay  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the 
rivers  ? 3.  Productions  ? 4.  What  are  the  capital  and  the  chief 
;owns  ? 5 What  is  the  government  ? 6.  Religion  ? 7.  State  of 
Kiucation  and  morals?  8.  How  is  Uruguay  bounded?  9.  What 


80 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


are  the  rivers?  iO.  Productions?  11.  What  are  the  capital  and  the 
chief  towns  ? 12.  What  is  the  government?  13.  Religion?  14.  Ed- 

ucation  and  morals?  15.  Where  is  Patagonia?  lb.  What  is  said 
of  it  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  New  Jersey.  2.  Pennsylvania.  3.  Dela- 
ware. 4.  Maryland.  5.  Virginia.  6.  Ohio.  7.  Michigan.  8.  In- 
diana. 9.  Illinois.  10.  Missouri.  11.  Arkansas. 

Second  Course.  (What  countries  border  on  the  Atlantic  Ocean  ? 
What  on  the  C.  Sea  ? What  on  the  Pacific  ? What  lakes  in  South 
America?  Mention  the  principal  chains  of  mountains.  What  is 
the  length  of  the  principal  rivers  in  South  America  ? What  is  their 
course  ? Into  what  do  they  flow  ?) 


-o~ 


LESSON  XXXVII. 

SUSOPB. 


Boundaries.  Europe  is  bounded  north  by  the  A.  Ocean, 
east  by  A.,  south  by  the  B.,  A.,  and  M.  Seas,  west  by  the 
A.  Ocean. 

Islands.  Cyprus,  Candia,  Sicily,  Sardinia,  Corsica,  the 
British  Isles,  Iceland,  and  Nova  Zembla. 

Capes.  North  Cape,  Cape  Clear,  and  Cape  Ortegal. 

Peninsulas.  Greece,  Italy,  Spain,  Denmark,  Sweden 
and  Norway. 

Mountains.  Ural,  Carpathian,  Apennines,  Alps,  Pyrenees, 
Dofrafield. 

Seas.  Azof,  Black,  Marmora,  Archipelago,  Mediterra- 
nean, Irish,  North,  Baltic,  and  White  Seas. 

Gulfs  and  Bays.  Gulf  of  Venice,  Taranto,  Genoa, 
Lyons,  Bothnia,  Finland,  Bay  of  Biscay. 

Channels  and  Straits.  Straits  of  Bosphorus,  Gibraltar, 
Dover,  Scager  Rack,  the  British  and  St.  George’s 
Channels. 


EUROPE. 


81 


Lakes.  Constance,  Geneva,  Wener,  Wetter,  Ladoga, 
and  Onega. 

Ri  vers.  Dwina,  Volga,  Don,  Dnieper,  Dniester,  and  the 
Danube. 

Minerals.  Gold,  silver,  quicksilver,  platina,  and  pre- 
cious stones. 

Divisions.  Europe  is  divided  into  Turkey,  G.,  A.,  S., 
I.,  S.,  P„  F.,  E.,  L,  S.,  B.,  H.,  G.,  P.,  D„  N.,  S.,  and  R. 
(The  pupil  need  not  commit  these  names,  but  simply  ascer- 
tain where  these  places  lie.) 

Inhabitants.  Europe  is  inhabited  almost  entirely  by 
civilized  races  of  men. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Europe  bounded  ? 2.  What  islands 
near  ? 3.  What  capes  ? 4.  Peninsulas  ? 5.  Mountains  ? 6.  Seas  ? 
7.  Gulfs  and  bays  ? 8.  Channels  and  straits  ? 9.  What  lakes  ? 

10.  Rivers?  11.  Minerals?  12.  What  are  the  civil  divisions? 
13.  By  whom  is  Europe  inhabited  ? 

Review.  What  is  an  island?  Cape?  Peninsula?  Mountain? 
Plain?  What  is  a sea?  Gulf  or  bay?  Channel?  Sound?  Strait? 
What  is  a lake  ? A river  ? 


LESSON  XXXVIII, 


SPAIN  AND  PORTUGAL. 

SPAIN. 

Boundaries.  Spain  is  bounded  north  by  the  Bay  of  B. 
and  F.,  east  by  the  M.  Sea,  south  by  the  junction  of  the  M. 
Sea  and  the  A.  Ocean,  west  by  P.  and  the  A.  Ocean. 
Rivers.  The  Ebro,  Duero,  Tagus,  and  Guadiana. 
Mountains.  The  Pyrenees. 

Productions.  Grain,  cotton,  rice,  tropical  fruits,  oil,  and 
wines. 


82 


P A R'f  1C  C L A K VtfiRL 


Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Madrid  is  the  capital.  it  is 
a rich  and  beautiful  city.  The  streets  are  regular,  arid  the 
public  buildings  magnificent.  The  new  palace  is  one  of 
the  finest  royal  residences  in  Europe.  Population,  220,000. 

Barcelona  has  120,000  inhabitants,  Seville,  92-000. 

Government.  A limited  monarchy.  A monarchy  is  a 
government  administered  by  one  individual,  who  usually 
receives  the  crown  by  inheritance.  If  the  power  of  the 
monarch  is  restrained  by  law,  or  other  branches  of  govern- 
ment, it  is  a limited  monarchy ; if  the  sovereign  power  is  not 
restrained,  it  is  an  absolute  monarchy. 

Religion.  Roman  Catholic. 

Education  and  Morals.  Both  are  very  much  neglected. 
Learning  and  refinement  are  limited  to  the  higher  classes 

O O 

of  society. 

Remarks.  The  face  of  the  country  in  Spain  is  very  much 
diversified.  The  scenery  is  generally  picturesque  and  beautiful. 
The  climate  is  mild ; the  land  good,  but  not  well  tilled.  The  in- 
habitants are  tall,  bold,  tenacious  of  honor,  and  fond  of  amusement, 
Quicksilver,  iron,  coal,  sulphur,  and  marble,  are  found  here. 

PORTUGAL. 


Boundaries.  Portugal  is  bounded  north  and  east  by  S., 
south  and  west  by  the  A.  Ocean. 

Rivers.  The  Duero  and  TagUs. 

Productions.  (See  Spain,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Lisbon,  on  the  Tagus,  is  the 
capital.  It  is  a rich  and  splendid  city.  It  abounds  in  magnifi- 
cent edifices.  It  has  a large  trade,  and  262,000  inhabitants. 

Oporto,  on  the  Duero  River,  has  an  extensive  trade  in 
wines  and  fruit.  Population,  75,000.  Coimbra  has  20,000 
inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  Spain.) 

Religion.  (See  Spain.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Spain.) 

Remarks.  The  facts  Stated  in  respect  to  Spain  hold  true, 
substantially,  in  respect  to  Portugal.  The  people  are  hospitable, 


EUROPE. 


83 


but  Superstitious.  They  are  passionately  fond  of  amusement. 
Most  of  them  are  miserably  poor.  There  is  a large  variety  of 
mineral  productions  in  this  country. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Spain  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  What  are  the  mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What 
are  the  capital  and  the  chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 

7.  What  is  a monarchy  ? 8.  A limited  monarchy  ? 9.  An  absolute 

monarchy?  10.  What  is  the  religion  ? 11.  What  is  the  state  of 

education  and  morals  ? 12.  How  is  Portugal  bounded?  13.  What 

are  the  rivers  ? 14.  The  productions  ? 15.  What  are  the  capital 

and  chief  towns?  16.  What  is  the  government?  17.  Religion? 
18.  Education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  Answer  each  question  in  reference  to,  1.  Kentucky. 
2.  Tennessee.  3.  North  Carolina.  4.  South  Carolina.  5.  Georgia. 
6.  Alabama.  7.  Mississippi.  8.  Louisiana. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Spain  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Portugal?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Oporto  to  Quebec  ? 


* 


LESSON  XXXIX. 
ITALY  AND  GREECE. 


ITALY. 

Boundaries.  Italy  is  bounded  north  by  S.  and  A.,  east 
by  the  Gulf  of  V.,  south  and  west  by  the  M.  Sea. 

Rivers.  The  Po  and  Tiber. 

Mountains.  Apennines,  and  Mount  Vesuvius,  a volcano. 

Productions.  (See  Spain,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Rome  is  the  capital  of  the 
Papal  Dominions,  both  civil  and  ecclesiastical.  It  is  one  of 
the  most  ancient  and  splendid  cities  on  the  globe.  It  is  the 
seat  of  the  pope  and  his  court.  St.  Peter’s  Church  is  a 


84 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


splendid  specimen  of  architecture,  and  the  wonder  of  the 
world.  Population  of  Rome,  150,000. 

The  other  principal  cities  are  Naples,  which  has  360,000 
inhabitants,  Venice,  and  Milan. 


Cathedral  at  Milan. 


Government.  (See  Remarks,  at  the  end  of  the  lesson.) 

Religion.  (See  Spain.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Spain.) 

Remarks.  The  peninsula  of  Italy  is  divided  into  several  dis- 
tinct governments.  Some  of  them  are  independent ; others  are 
subject  to  foreign  powers.  Lombardy  is  dependent  on  Austria. 
It  lies  between  the  Po  and  the  Alps.  Tuscany  is  also  depend- 
ent on  Austria.  It  lies  on  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  Parma,  Mo- 
dena, and  Lucca,  lie  in  the  northern  part,  and  are  dependent  on 
Austria.  The  States  of  the  Church,  including  San  Marino,  are 
in  Central  Italy.  They  are  dependent  on  the  pope.  Sardinia,  in- 
cluding Piedmont,  Genoa,  Savoy;  and  Naples,  together  with  the 
Island  of  Sicily  and  several  other  contiguous  islands,  are 
independent.  Italy  is  the  seat  of  the  ancient  Roman  empire. 
Its  soil  is  rich,  its  scenery  grand.  It  abounds  in  specimens  of 
ancient  and  modern  art,  and  architecture. 


EUROPE. 


85 


GREECE. 

Boundaries.  Greece  is  bounded  north  by  T.,  east  by 
the  Archipelago,  south  and  west  by  the  M.  Sea. 

Mountains.  There  are  several  small  mountains  in  Greece, 
among  which  is  the  celebrated  Parnassus. 

Productions.  (See  Spain.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Athens  is  the  capital.  It  is 
a city,  celebrated  in  ancient  and  modern  history.  It  was 
once  the  seat  of  learning,  refinement,  and  power.  It  is  now 
but  the  shadow  of  what  it  once  was.  Present  population, 
14,000. 

Navarino  and  Corinth  are  the  other  principal  towns. 

Government.  (See  Spain.) 

Religion.  Greek  church.  This  form  of  religion  resem- 
bles the  Roman  Catholic.  Its  adherents,  however,  do  not 
acknowledge  the  supremacy  of  the  pope. 

Education  and  Morals.  Poor,  but  improving. 

Remarks.  Greece,  in  many  respects,  resembles  Italy.  It  is 
the  seat  of  the  ancient  Grecian  empire.  It  is  rich  in  relics  of 
former  grandeur,  among  the  most  interesting  of  which  is  the 
Acropolis,  crowned  with  a splendid  temple,  devoted  to  Minerva. 

The  Ionian  Republic  consists  of  seven  small  islands,  west  of 
Greece.  Corfu  is  the  capital. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Italy  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  Capital  and  chief 
towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  Religion?  8.  Educa- 
tion and  morals  ? 9.  How  is  Greece  bounded  ? 10.  What  are  the 

mountains?  11.  Productions?  12.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief 
towns?  13.  What  is  the  government?  14.  Religion?  15.  State 
of  education  and  morals. 

Review  Lessons  XXVII.,  XXVIII.,  XXIX.,  and  XXX. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Italy  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Greece  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Rome  to  New  Orleans  ? 

8 


PARTICULAR  VIEW, 


86 


LESSON  XL. 
TURKEY  AND  AUSTRIA. 
TURKEY 


Mosque  of  St.  Sophia. 


Turkey  lies  partly  in  Europe  and  partly  in  Asia. 
Boundaries.  Turkey  in  Europe  is  bounded  north  by 
A.,  east  by  R.  and  the  B.  Sea,  south  by  the  Sea  of  M. 
and  A.,  and  by  G.,  west  by  the  Gulf  of  V.  and  by  A. 
Rivers.  The  Danube  and  its  branches. 

Mountains.  The  Carpathian  Mountains.  The  princi 
pal  chain  in  this  country  is  the  Balkan  chain. 


TURCTtf. 


87 

Productions.  (See  Spain,  and  the  other  countries  of 
Southern  Europe.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Constantinople,  the  capital, 
is  a splendid  city.  It  has  a large  commerce,  and  many  ele- 
gant edifices.  Population,  600,000. 

Adrianople  and  Salonica  are  extensive  cities. 

Government.  An  absolute  monarchy. 

Religion.  The  religion  is  Mahometan.  Other  sects  are 
tolerated.  Mahometanism  is  a mixed  religion,  composed 
of  the  Jewish,  Papal,  and  pagan.  The  Mahometans  be- 
lieve in  one  God,  and  that  Mahomet  was  his  last  and  principal 
messenger  to  mankind.  They  believe  in  a paradise  where 
all  will  be  rewarded  according  to  their  valor  in  propagating 
their  religion,  and  their  faithfulness  in  its  duties  and  aus- 
terities. 

Education  and  Morals.  The  state  of  education  and 
morals  is  bad.  The  Koran  is  their  principal  text-book 
in  science,  literature,  and  morals. 

Remarks.  The  face  of-  the  country  in  Turkey  is  diversified. 
The  soil  and  climate  are  excellent.  The  advantages  for 
commerce  are  good.  Turkey  produces  alum  and  sulphur  in 
abundance.  Gold,  copper,  iron,  lead,  and  quarries  of  excellent 
marble,  are  found  here.  Useful  drugs,  fine  carpets,  crapes,  and 
gauzes,  are  manufactured  in  this  country. 


AUSTRIA. 

Boundaries.  Austria  is  bounded  north  by  P.  and  P., 
east  by  R..  and  T.,  south  by  T.,  the  Gulf  of  V.,  and  by  I., 
west  by  S.  and  G. 

Rivers.  The  Danube  and  its  branches.  (See  Turkey.) 

Mountains.  (See  Turkey.) 

Productions.  Grain  of  various  kinds,  including  wheat, 
rye,  oats,  corn,  &c.,  fruits,  and  the  products  of  their  ex- 
tensive pastures  and  forests. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Vienna  is  the  capital  of  tlii- 
empire.  It  is  pleasantly  situated  in  the  midst  of  a fertih 
region.  It  has  many  public  squares,  monasteries,  theatres 
churches,  and  splendid  palaces.  Population,  300,000. 


ss 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Prague  and  Buda  are  each  places  of  note. 

Government.  An  absolute  monarchy.  In  its  bearings 
upon  some  of  the  states,  it  is  limited.  Austria  is  an  em- 
pire ; the  sovereign  is  styled  emperor. 

An  empire  is  a government  that  includes  several  distinct 
states  or  kingdoms. 

Religion.  Roman  Catholic.  Other  sects  are  tolerated. 

Education  and  Morals.  GenerSJ  education  is  more  at- 
tended to  than  in  most  Catholic  countries ; and  yet  the 
state  of  education  and  morals  is,  upon  the  whole,  low. 

Remarks.  Austria  embraces  the  kingdom  of  Hungary,  a part 
of  the  kingdom  of  Poland,  and  a portion  of  the  German  domin- 
ions. The  soil  and  climate  are  excellent.  The  mineral  produc- 
tions are  copper,  iron,  silver,  gold,  lead,  and  quicksilver. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Turkey  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
■ivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 7.  Religion  ? 

8.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How  is  Austria  bounded  ? 

10.  What  are  the  rivers?  11.  Mountains?  12.  Productions 3 
13.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns  ? 14.  What  is  the  govern- 
ment? 15.  What  is  an  empire  ? 16.  What  is  the  religion  of  Aus- 
tria ? 17.  What  is  the  general  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  Describe, 1.  Texas.  2.  Mexico.  3.  Guatimala.  4.  The 
West  Indies.  5.  New  Grenada.  6.  Venezuela.  7.  Guiana. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Turkey  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital?  Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Austria  ? Where  is  each  town  situated?  Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Vienna  to  St.  Louis? 


EUROPE 


89 


LESSON  X L I . 
RUSSIA  AND  POLAND. 


RUSSIA. 


Admiralty. 


The  Russian  empire  is  the  largest  territorial  empire  on 
the  globe. 

Boundaries.  Russia  is  bounded  north  by  the  A.  Ocean, 
east  by  Asiatic  Russia,  south  by  the  A.  and  B.  Seas,  and 
by  T.  and  A.,  west  by  P.,  the  B.  Sea,  and  by  S.  and  N. 

Rivers.  The  Dwina,  Volga,  Don,  and  Dnieper,  are  among 
the  largest. 

Mountains.  The  Ural  Mountains. 

Productions.  These  are  various.  In  Southern  Russia, 
they  correspond  with  those  of  Austria.  In  the  northern 
regions,  they  are  furs,  timbers,  and  minerals. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  St.  Petersburg  is  the  capital. 
Its  site  is  low.  Parts  of  the  spot  on  which  it  stands  were 
8 * 


90 


PAHTICULAK  VIEW. 


once  islands,  marsh,  or  water.  It  is  one  of  the  most  ex- 
posed, hut  beautiful  cities  on  the  globe.  Its  temples, 
palaces,  and  artificial  works,  are  splendid.  Population, 
500,000. 

Moscow,  the  ancient  capital  of  Russia,  was  mostly 
destroyed  by  fire,  at  the  French  invasion  under  Napoleon, 
in  1812.  The  great  bell  of  Moscow  is  21  feet  in  circum- 
ference. It  is  the  largest  in  the  world.  This  city  contains 
many  magnificent  buddings.  The  trade,  however,  is  small. 
Present  population,  250,000. 

Cronstadt,  Riga,  Orel,  and  Tula,  are  important  places. 

Government.  An  absolute  monarchy.  The  emperor  is 
the  supreme  head  of  church  and  state. 

Religion.  (See  Greece.)  Other  sects  are  tolerated,  and 
are  numerous. 

Education  and  Morals.  Both  are  in  a low  condition. 
Religion  and  government  exert  but  little  influence  over  the 
majority  of  the  people.  Heathenism  prevails  over  a large 
part  of  the  empire.  The  lower  class,  or  serfs,  are  in  a state 
of  vassalage  to  the  lords. 

Remarks.  This  country  is  generally  level.  In  the  northern 
parts,  the  soil  is  barren  and  the  climate  cold.  In  the  southern 
parts,  the  climate  is  mild  and  the  soil  good.  The  land  is  culti- 
vated mostly  by  the  serfs.  Mines  of  gold,  silver,  and  copper, 
are  found  here. 


POLAND. 

Boundaries.  Poland  is  bounded  north  and  east  by  R., 
south  by  A.,  west  by  P. 

Rivers.  Vistula  and  Niemen. 

Productions.  Corn,  grain,  hemp,  and  the  products  of 
the  pastures  and  forests.  Large  numbers  of  cattle  and 
sheep  are  raised  here. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Warsaw  is  considered  the 
capital.  This  city,  though  irregularly  built,  abounds  in 
splendid  palaces  and  works  of  art.  Population,  150,000. 

Kalisch  and  Lublin  are  the  chief  towns.  They  have 
each  about  12,000  inhabitants. 


EUROPE. 


91 


Government.  Poland  is  subject  to  Russia.  The  em- 
peror of  Russia  is  also  king  of  Poland. 

Religion.  The  Roman  Catholic  religion  prevails  here. 

Education  and  Morals.  Poor,  but  improving.  (See 
Greece.) 

Remarks.  The  land  in  Poland  is  level,  and  the  soil  excellent 
A species  of  manna  falls  by  night,  and  is  collected  in  sieves 
in  the  morning.  It  is  a great  luxury.  — Poland  was  formerly  one 
of  the  largest  kingdoms  in  Europe.  Only  about  one  fifth  of  the 
ancient  kingdom  is  now  called  Poland.  — The  inhabitants  are  tall, 
athletic,  and  handsome  in  their  persons,  and  courteous  and  hos- 
pitable to  strangers. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Russia  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 7.  Religion  ? 

8.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How  is  Poland  bounded  ? 

10.  What  are  the  rivers?  11.  Productions  ? 12.  What  are  the  cap- 
ital and  chief  towns  ? 13.  What  is  the  government ? 14.  Religion? 

15.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  Equador.  2.  Brazil.  3.  Peru.  4.  Bolivia. 
5.  United  Provinces.  6.  Paraguay.  7.  Uruguay.  8.  Chili. 

Second  Course.  Whatremarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Russia  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Poland  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  St.  Petersburg  to  Bangor  ? 


LESSON  XLII. 

SWITZERLAND  AND  GERMANY. 

SWITZERLAND. 

Boundaries.  Switzerland  is  bounded  north  by  G.,  east 
by  A.,  south  by  I.,  west  by  F. 

Rivers.  The  Rhine  and  Rhone  have  their  source  in 
this  country. 


92 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Mountains.  The  Alps. 

Productions.  Grains,  and  the  products  of  the  pasture, 
which  are  cattle,  wool,  butter,  and  cheese.  (See  Austria,  in 
general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Berne,  Zurich,  and  Lucerne, 
are  alternately  the  capitals.  Berne  is  a beautiful  city,  with 
extensive  trade  and  manufactures.  It  is  the  seat  of  many 
important  seminaries.  Population,  18,000. 

Geneva  is  the  most  flourishing  city  in  Switzerland.  It  is 
situated  on  Lake  Geneva,  which  renders  its  scenery  beauti- 
ful. It  was  the  residence  of  Calvin,  the  great  reformer. 
Population,  27,000. 

Basle  is  noted  for  its  trade,  commerce,  and  literary  insti- 
tutions. Population,  16,000. 

Government.  A confederacy,  made  up  of  over  twenty 
distinct  states,  differing  somewhat  in  the  character  of  their 
government. 

Religion.  Protestant.  There  are  also  Roman  Catholics 
and  Jews. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Good,  in  general. 
There  are  many  flourishing  literary  institutions  here. 

Remarks.  Switzerland  is  a land  of  wonders.  It  is  noted  for 
its  mountains,  glaciers,  and  cataracts.  The  glaciers  are  tracts 
of  glittering  ice,  that  have  been  accumulating  for  ages.  They 
sometimes  take  the  shape  of  cities  of  crystal,  with  spires  and  tur- 
rets blazing  in  the  sun.  Avalanches  of  snow  and  ice  from  these 
mountains  are  frequent,  and  often  disastrous.  Over  the  Alps 
Buonaparte  constructed  a military  road,  more  than  a mile  high. 
There  are  several  beautiful  lakes  in  this  country,  the  largest  of 
which  are  Lakes  Constance  and  Geneva ; the  former  of  which  may 
be  styled  the  “Lake  of  the  Clouds.” 


GERMANY. 

Boundaries.  Germany  is  bounded  north  by  the  N.  Sea, 
D.,  and  the  B.  Sea,  east  by  P.  and  A.,  south  by  A.  and  S., 
west  by  F.,  B.,  and  H. 

Rivers.  The  Rhine,  Elbe,  and  Danube. 


EUROPE. 


93 


Mountains.  The  Alps  and  Carpathian  Mountains  ex- 
tend into  this  country. 

Productions.  (See  Austria.)  Grains,  fruits,  and  the 
products  of  the  pasture  and  forest. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Frankfort  is  the  seat  of  the 
“ German  Diet.”  It  is  a place  of  extensive  commerce.  It 
has  much  wealth  and  beauty.  Population,  55,000. 

Munich  is  one  of  the  handsomest  cities  in  Germany.  It 
is  adorned  with  promenades  and  splendid  buildings.  The 
Royal  Palace  is  one  of  the  finest  in  Europe.  Population, 
80,000 

Hanover  is  an  ancient  city.  It  has  many  elegant  struc- 
tures of  hewn  stone.  Population,  28,000. 

Hamburg  has  many  elegant  edifices,  a thriving  commerce, 
and  many  institutions  and  libraries.  Population,  125,000. 

Government.  A confederacy,  made  up  of  over  30  dif- 
ferent states  and  cities,  having  various  forms  of  government. 

Education  and  Morals.  In  Protestant  Germany,  the 
state  of  education  and  morality  is  good.  Germany  abounds 
in  universities.  In  the  cultivation  of  music,  the  Germans 
rank  next  to  the  Italians.  It  is  taught  in  the  common 
schools,  as  a part  of  education. 

Remarks.  Under  the  title  of  Germany  are  included  parts  of 
Austria,  Prussia,  Bavaria,  Wirtemburg,  Saxony,  Hanover,  Baden, 
and  the  cities  of  Hamburg,  Frankfort,  Bremen,  and  Lubec.  There 
are  about  20  other  states  of  less  note.  These  states  and  cities 
have  entered  into  what  is  called  the  “ German  Confederacy,”  by 
which  they  are  bound  to  defend  each  other  in  war,  and  to  submit 
all  their  disputes  to  be  settled  by  the  Federative  Diet.  — This 
country  abounds  in  fine  cattle  and  sheep.  Silver,  copper,  tin, 
and  coal,  are  found  here. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Switzerland  bounded?  2.  What  are 
the  rivers  ? 3.  Mountains  ? 4.  Productions  ? 5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  chief  towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  Religion? 
8.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How  is  Germany  bounded  ? 

10.  What  are  the  rivers?  11.  Mountains?  12.  Productions'1 
13.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns  ? 14.  What  is  the  govern- 
ment? 15.  Religion  ? 16.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 17.  What 

is  said  of  the  cultivation  of  music? 

Review  Describe,  1.  Spain.  2.  Portugal.  3.  Italy.  4.  Greece. 
5.  Turkey.  6.  Austria. 


94 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Swit- 
zerland ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Germany?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Frankfort  to  Washington? 


LESSON  XLIII. 
FRANCE  AND  BELGIUM. 
FRANCE. 


Boundaries.  France  is  bounded  north  by  the  B.  Channel, 
Straits  of  D.,  and  by  B.,  east  by  G.,  S.,  and  I.,  south  by  the 
M.  Sea  and  S.,  west  by  the  Bay  of  B. 


Rivers.  The  Loire,  Garonne,  Seine,  and  Rhone. 
Mountains.  The  Alps  and  Pyrenees. 

Productions.  Same  as  in  Central  Europe,  generally  — 


EUROPE. 


95 


various  kinds  of  grain,  the  products  of  the  pasture,  fruits, 
wines,  and  oil. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Paris  is  the  capital.  It  is 
enclosed  by  a wall  17  miles  in  circuit.  It  is  a splendid  and 
fashionable  city.  It  abounds  in  magnificent  edifices,  prom- 
enades, fountains,  and  places  of  amusement.  Population, 
nearly  1,000,000. 

Lyons,  Marseilles,  and  Bourdeaux,  have  each  great  wealth, 
beauty,  and  commercial  advantages,  and  each  has  a popu- 
lation of  over  100,000. 

Government.  A limited  monarchy.  It  secures  to  the 
people,  in  effect,  nearly  the  whole  political  power.  The 
crown  only  is  hereditary,  and  this  in  the  male  line. 

Religion.  (See  Spain.)  All  sects  are  tolerated  here, 
and  have  equal  rights.  Protestantism  is  advancing. 

Education  and  Morals.  The  general  state  of  education 
and  morals  is  low.  Literary  advantages  are  restricted 
mostly  to  the  higher  classes  of  society. 

Remarks.  France  presents  a diversity  of  surface  and  scenery. 
The  soil  and  climate  are  excellent.  The  French  hold  a high 
rank  in  the  scientific  world.  Amusement  and  dissipation  abound 
in  France,  especially  in  the  large  cities.  Coal,  lead,  manganese, 
and  some  other  minerals,  abound  in  this  country. 


BELGIUM. 

Boundaries.  Belgium  is  bounded  north  by  H.,  east  by 
G.,  south  by  F.,  west  by  the  N.  Sea. 

Rivers.  The  Scheldt  and  Rhine. 

Productions.  (See  Austria.)  The  land  is  in  a high  stale 
of  cultivation,  and  yields  various  kinds  of  grain  and  fruit. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Brussels  is  the  capital.  It  is 
a large  manufacturing  city.  It  has  many  fine  squares  and 
palaces.  Its  location  is  beautiful  ; its  suburbs  extensive. 
Population,  100,000. 

Antwerp  contains  one  of  the  most  elegant  cathedrals  in 
the  world.  Its  spire  is  440  feet  high.  This  city  is  now 
on  the  decline ; has  less  than  half  its  former  inhabitants. 
Once  it  had  200,000  inhabitants,  and  was  one  of  the  richest 
cities  in  the  world.  Now  the  population  is  only  70,000. 


90 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Government.  (See  France.) 

Religion.  (See  France.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  France.) 

Remarks.  The  land  is  low,  but  fertile.  Great  attention  is 
paid  to  agriculture  and  manufactures.  The  fine  arts,  especially 
that  of  painting,  are  carried  to  great  perfection  here.  The 
country  is  intersected  by  numerous  canals  and  small  streams  of 
water.  — The  celebrated  battle  of  Waterloo  was  fought  in  Bel- 
gium. 


QUESTIONS.  J.  How  is  France  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  chief  towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  Religion? 
8.  What  is  the  state  of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  How  is  Bel- 

gium bounded?  10.  What  are  the  rivers?  11.  The  productions? 
12.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns  ? 13.  What  is  the  govern- 

ment? 14.  Religion?  15.  State  of  education  and  morals ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  Austria.  2.  Switzerland.  3.  Germany. 
4.  Poland.  5.  Russia. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  France? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Belgium  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital?  Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Paris  to  Lima  ? 


LESSON  XL  IV. 

PRUSSIA  AND  DENMARK. 

PRUSSIA. 

Boundaries.  Prussia  is  bounded  north  by  the  B.  Sea. 
east  by  P.,  south  by  A.  and  G.,  west  by  G. 

Rivers.  Elbe,  Oder,  Vistula,  and  Niemen. 

Productions.  Grain,  timber,  the  products  of  the  pasture, 
viz.,  butter,  cheese,  cattle,  sheep,  &c. 


EUROPE. 


97 


squares  are  elegant.  The  public  buildings  are  splendid. 
The  Royal  Palace  is  one  of  the  most  magnificent  in  Europe. 
The  Arsenal  is  said  to  be  the  largest  in  the  world.  There 
are  several  universities  and  literary  institutions  here.  Pop- 
ulation, 244,000. 

Cologne,  on  the  Rhine,  is  a place  of  large  trade,  and  has 
66,000  inhabitants. 

Breslau,  upon  the  Oder,  is  one  of  the  largest  cities  in 
Prussia.  It  is  celebrated  for  its  trade  and  literary  institu- 
tions. Population,  90,000. 

Government.  Absolute  monarchy.  The  power  of  the 
sovereign,  however,  is  exercised  mildly. 

Religion.  Protestant,  Lutheran.  They  hold  to  the  opin- 
ions and  forms  inculcated  by  Luther,  the  great  reformer. 

Education  and  Morals.  Nowhere  in  the  world  are  the 
blessings  of  education  more  generally  enjoyed  than  in 
Prussia.  As  might  be  expected,  the  state  of  morality  is 
good. 

Remarks.  Prussia  is  distinguished  for  its  excellent  systems 
of  education.  All  are  required  by  law  to  furnish  the  means  of 
education  for  their  children.  The  surface  of  the  country  is  gen- 
erally level,  but  the  soil  is  poor.  Amber  is  found  here  in  large 
quantities. 


DENMARK. 

Boundaries.  Denmark  is  bounded  north  by  the  Strait 
of  S.,  east  by  the  Straits  of  C.  and  the  B.  Sea,  south  by  G., 
west  by  the  N.  Sea. 

Productions.  Grains,  and  the  proceeds  of  the  pasture 
and  flocks.  (See  Austria,  and  Central  Europe,  in  general.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Copenhagen  is  the  seat  of 
government.  Its  site  is  somewhat  like  that  of  St.  Peters- 
burg. Its  streets,  squares,  and  public  buildings,  resem- 
ble those  of  Berlin.  Population,  124,000. 

The  chief  towns  are  Altona  and  Flensburg  : the  former 
has  30,000,  the  latter  15,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  Absolute  monarchy,  modified,  however,  by 
the  intelligence  of  the  people.  (See  Prussia.) 

9 


98 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Religion.  Protestant,  Lutheran.  (See  Prussia.) 

Education  and  Morals.  Gymnasiums  and  primary 
schools  abound  here.  The  general  state  of  education  and 
morality  is  good ; and  yet  the  effects  of  the  old  feudal  sys- 
tem are  still  felt.  Whole  territories,  once  subjected  to  mil- 
itary chieftains  and  conquerors,  still  remain,  by  a kind  of 
entailment,  in  the  line  of  their  ancestors,  and  are  in  the  same 
state  of  vassalage. 

Remarks.  Denmark  is  a commercial  country.  The  climate 
and  soil  are  good.  The  atmosphere  is  generally  hazy  and  moist. 
The  Danes  are  a moral,  enlightened,  industrious,  and  courteous 
people. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Prussia  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Productions?  4.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns? 
5.  What  is  the  government ? 6.  Religion?  7.  What  is  the  state  of 

education  and  morals?  8.  How  is  Denmark  bounded?  9.  What 
are  the  productions  ? 10.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns  ? 

11.  What  is  the  government?  12.  Religion?  13.  State  of  educa- 
tion and  morals  ? 

Review  the  four  preceding  lessons. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Prussia  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Denmark  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Copenhagen  to  St.  John? 


LESSON  X L V . 

ENGLAND  AND  IRELAND. 

ENGLAND. 

Boundaries.  England  is  bounded  north  by  S.,  east  by 
the  N.  Sea,  south  by  the  Straits  of  I),  and  the  B.  Channel, 
west  by  St.  G.’s  Channel  and  the  I.  Sea. 

Rivers.  The  Thames  and  Severn. 

Mountains . The  Snowdon  Mountains,  in  Wales. 


EUROPE. 


99 


Productions.  The  land  in  England  is  in  a high  state  of 
cultivation.  Almost  every  article  is  raised  here  that  can  be 
cultivated  in  this  latitude.  All  kinds  of  grain  and  fruit  are 
produced  here. 


Westminster  Abbey. 


Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  London,  on  the  Thames,  is 
the  capital  of  the  British  empire.  It  is  the  largest,  richest, 
and  most  splendid  city  on  the  globe.  It  abounds  in 
parks,  palaces,  bridges,  theatres,  and  colleges.  Many  of 
the  churches  are  elegant. 

St.  Paul’s  Cathedral  is  one  of  the  finest  churches  in  the 
world.  London  has  been  denominated  a “ forest  of  splendor.” 
Some  parts  of  it,  however,  especially  those  included  in  the 
ancient  city,  are  mean.  Whole  population,  nearly  2,000,000. 

Next  to  London,  in  point  of  wealth  and  trade,  is  Liver- 
pool, situated  on  the  Mersey.  It  is  a great  commercial 
town,  having  an  extensive  trade  with  the  United  States. 
Population,  nearly  200,000. 

Manchester  and  Birmingham  are  large  manufacturing 
places ; the  former  of  cotton  goods,  the  latter  of  iron  ware 
of  all  kinds. 

Government.  A limited  monarchy.  The  king,  or 


100 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


queen,  is  head  of  the  church  and  state.  The  royal  power 
is  limited  by  parliament. 

Religion.  Protestant.  Episcopacy  is  the  established 
religion.  It  is  incorporated  with  the  government. 

Education  and  3Iorals.  The  privileges  of  education  are 
not  universally  enjoyed  here.  The  poor  are  ignorant,  but 
the  higher  classes  enjoy  every  advantage  for  the  cultivation 
of  the  mind  and  manners. 

Wales  is  a province  of  England,  situated  in  the  south- 
west part  of  the  island.  The  people  are  poor,  but  con- 
tented, industrious,  and  happy.  The  land  is  hilly,  but  pro- 
ductive. 

Remarks.  England  is  distinguished  for  its  commerce,  agri- 
culture, manufactures,  and  internal  improvements.  The  soil  is 
fine.  The  climate  is  less  variable  than  in  most  European  coun- 
tries. The  mineral  productions  are  coal,  copper,  tin,  iron,  and 
lead.  England  abounds  in  splendid  cities,  and  monuments  of 
wealth  and  power.  The  finest  breeds  of  cattle  are  raised  here. 


IRELAND. 

Boundaries.  Ireland  is  bounded  east  by  the  I.  Sea,  north, 
south,  and  west,  by  the  A.  Ocean. 

River.  The  Shannon. 

Productions.  Potatoes  and  flax  are  raised  here  in  abun- 
dance. (See  England,  and  Central  Europe,  generally.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  The  capital  is  Dublin.  It 
is  a city  of  elegance  and  of  poverty,  of  palaces  and  of 
hovels.  Things  are  seen  here  in  contrast.  It  has  much 
wealth  and  trade,  as  well  as  poverty  and  wretchedness. 
Population,  270,000. 

Cork  and  Limerick  stand  next  to  Dublin  in  point  of  im- 
portance and  population  ; the  former  having  over  100,000, 
and  the  latter  over  00,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  Ireland  is  subject  to  the  Gov.  of  England. 

Religion.  (See  France.)  Other  denominations  exist. 
All,  however,  are  subject  to  the  tithing  system. 

Education  and  Morals.  Both  are  in  a low  condition. 


EUROPE. 


101 


Remarks.  The  soil  of  Ireland  is  rich,  the  scenery  beautiful. 
There  are,  however,  numerous  bogs  and  morasses,  upon  this  island, 
that  are  unfit  for  cultivation.  In  Ireland  there  are  many  castles 
and  churches  in  a dilapidated  state.  The  Irish  are  a witty, 
hardy,  hospitable,  but  passionate  people.  The  Giants’  Cause- 
way is  a great  curiosity.  It  consists  of  more  than  100,000  pillars 
or  columns  of  basaltic  rock,  rising  to  a height  of  300  or  400  feet 
above  the  water. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  England  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 7.  Religion  ? 

8.  State  of  education  and  morals?  9.  How  is  Ireland  bounded? 
10.  What  river?  11.  What  are  the  productions?  12.  What  are 
the  capital  and  chief  towns?  13.  What  is  the  government?  14.  Re- 
ligion ? 15.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  each  country  in  South  America. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Eng- 
land ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest? 

What  was  said  of  Ireland  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Liverpool  to  New  York  ? 


LESSON  XLVI. 


HOLLAND  AND  SCOTLAND. 


HOLLAND. 

Boundaries . Holland  is  bounded  north  and  west  by  the 
N.  Sea,  east  by  G.,  and  south  by  B. 

River.  The  Rhine. 

Productions.  (See  Austria  and  Central  Europe.)  The 
land,  much  of  which  has  been  reclaimed  from  the  ocean,  is 
in  a high  state  of  improvement.  The  best  of  butter  and 
cheese  is  made  here. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Hague  is  the  capital.  It  is 
9* 


102 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


remarkable  for  its  canals,  and  is  one  of  the  best  built  cities 
in  Europe.  Population,  56,000. 

Amsterdam  is  a place  of  extensive  commerce  and  wealth. 
It  is  intersected  by  the  River  Amstel,  and  by  numerous 
canals,  across  which  there  are  nearly  300  bridges.  This 
city  contains  much  that  is  splendid  and  attractive.  It  is 
the  seat  of  many  literary  institutions.  Population,  200,000. 

Government.  A limited  monarchy. 

Religion.  (See  Prussia.) 

Education  and  Morals.  The  general  state  of  education 
and  morality  here  is  good. 

Remarks.  Holland  is  a low  and  level  country,  and  is  subject 
to  frequent  inundations  from  the  sea.  To  prevent  these,  immense 
dikes  are  raised  along  the  shore.  The  soil  is  excellent,  and  in  a 
high  state  of  cultivation.  Holland  abounds  in  canals,  which  serve 
both  as  mediums  of  travel  and  conveyance.  The  Dutch  are  an 
industrious  and  moral  people. 


SCOTLAND. 

Boundaries . Scotland  is  bounded  west  and  north  by 
the  A.  Ocean,  east  by  the  N.  Sea,  south  by  E.  and  the 
I.  Sea. 

Rivers.  There  are  a few  inconsiderable  streams,  most 
of  which  widen  near  the  ocean  into  friths. 

Mountains.  The  Grampian  Mountains  or  Hills. 

Productions.  The  same  as  in  Central  Europe  generally. 
Grain,  grass,  oats,  and  potatoes,  are  raised  here  in  abun- 
dance. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Edinburgh  is  the  capital.  It 
is  surrounded  by  rugged  cliffs  and  precipices,  giving  it  a 
romantic  and  picturesque  appearance.  It  is  a city  of  learn- 
ing, wealth,  and  trade.  Population,  180,000. 

Glasgow  is  the  largest  and  richest  city  in  Scotland.  J-X 
is  a place  of  extensive  trade  and  manufactures.  PopulalEa, 
200,000.  Aberdeen  has  60,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  Scotland  is  united  with  England,  and 
has  a representation  in  parliament. 

Religion.  Protestant. 


EUROPE. 


103 


Education  and  Morals.  Both  are  in  a high  state  of  cul- 
tivation. 

Remarks.  The  Highlands  are  cold  and  barren,  the  Lowlands 
mild  and  productive.  There  are  numerous  lakes,  or,  as  they  are 
here  called,  “lochs,”  interspersed  among  the  Highlands,  which 
often  give  the  scenery  a picturesque  aspect.  The  Scotch  are 
brave,  hardy,  and  intelligent. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Holland  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  What  are  the  productions  ? 4.  What  are  the  capital  and 

chief  towns?  5.  What  is  said  of  the  government?  6.  Religion? 
7.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 8.  How  is  Scotland  bounded  ? 

0.  What  are  the  mountains?  10.  Productions?  11.  What  are  the 
capital  and  chief  towns  ? 12.  Government  ? 13.  Religion?  14.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  Spain.  2.  Portugal.  3.  Italy.  4.  Greece. 
5.  Turkey.  6.  Austria  7.  Switzerland.  8.  Germany. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Hol- 
land ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital?  Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest? 

What  was  said  of  Scotland  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Edinburgh  to  Mecca? 


LESSON  XL  VII. 
NORWAY  AND  SWEDEN. 


NORWAY. 

Boundaries.  Norway  is  bounded  north  by  the  A.  Ocean, 
east  by  L.  and  S.,  south  by  the  Strait  of  S.,  west  by  the  A. 
Ocean. 

Rivers.  None  of  note. 

Mountains.  The  Dofrafield. 

Productions.  Their  fisheries  are  sources  of  large  profit. 
Timber,  fur,  and  mineral  productions,  abound  here. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Christiana  is  the  capital.  It 


104 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


is  built  in  a valley.  The  streets  are  neat  and  regular.  It 
has  a fine  harbor,  and  a population  of  20,500. 

Bergen  is  similarly  situated,  and  is  about  as  large  as 
Christiana.  Drontheim  has  13,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  This  kingdom  is  united  with  Sweden 

Religion.  Protestant. 

Education  and  Morals.  Learning  is  pretty  extensively 
diffused.  Itinerant  teachers  communicate  instruction  to 
the  common  people  to  great  advantage. 

Remarks.  Norway  is  a cold  and  barren  region.  The  prin- 
cipal sources  of  wealth  are  the  fisheries,  forests  of  oaks,  elm,  fir, 
and  pine.  On  the  coast  of  Norway  is  the  celebrated  vortex 
called  the  Maelstrom.  Large  vessels  have  been  drawn  into  this 
whirlpool.  The  Norwegians  are  an  honest,  courageous,  and 
moral  people. 


SWEDEN. 

Boundaries.  Sweden  is  bounded  north  by  N.  and  L.s 
east  by  the  Gulf  of  B.  and  the  B.  Sea,  south  by  the  B.  Sea, 
west  by  N. 

Lakes.  Wener  and  Wetter. 

Mountains.  (See  Norway.) 

Productions.  (See  Norway.)  Also  grains,  and  the 
products  of  the  pasture. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  The  capital  is  Stockholm 
It  is  built  upon  several  islands  and  peninsulas.  Its  situation 
is  beautiful,  and  its  trade  large.  It  has  80,000  inhabitants. 

Gottenburg  is  well  fortified,  and  has  a good  harbor.  Pop- 
ulation, 25,000.  Carlscrona  has  14,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  A limited  monarchy. 

Religion.  Protestant,  Lutheran.  It  has  more  of  form 
than  of  spirit  and  power. 

Education  and  Morals.  Most  of  the  inhabitants  can 
read  and  write.  The  general  state  of  education  and  morals, 
however,  is  low. 

Remarks.  Sweden  abounds  in  lakes  and  small  streams.  It 
is  a cold,  barren  country. 

Lapland  is  situated  in  the  northern  part  of  Europe.  It  is  a 


ASIA. 


105 

dreary  and  barren  region.  The  inhabitants  are  stupid  and  super- 
stitious. The  reindeer  afford  them  food  and  clothing.  They 
are  beasts  of  burden,  and  have  great  swiftness  in  travelling. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Norway  bounded  ? 2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the  capital 
and  chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 7.  Religion  ? 

8.  State  of  education  and  morals?  9.  How  is  Sweden  bounded? 
10.  What  lakes  there?  11.  Mountains?  12.  What  are  the  pro- 
ductions? 13.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns?  14.  What 
is  the  government?  15.  What  is  the  religion?  16.  What  is  the 
state  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  France.  2.  England.  3.  Ireland.  4.  Scot- 
land. 5.  Belgium.  6.  Holland.  7.  Germany.  8.  Prussia. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Norway  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Sweden  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital?  Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Stockholm  to  Savannah  ? 


LESSON  XLVIII. 

ASIA. 

Boundaries.  Asia  is  bounded  north  by  the  A.  Ocean, 
east  by  the  seas  bordering  on  the  P.  Ocean,  south  by  the 
I.  Ocean,  west  by  the  M.  Sea  and  E. 

Islands.  Nova  Zembla,  Japan  Islands,  Philippine  Isles, 
Borneo,  Sumatra,  and  Ceylon. 

Capes.  Comorin,  and  Lopatka. 

Peninsulas.  Kamtschatka,  Corea,  Malacca,  and  Arabia. 

Mountains.  Himmaleh,  Sinai,  Ararat,  and  Altay  (or 
Altai)  Mountains. 

Deserts.  Great  Desert,  Sandy  Desert,  Desert  of  Shamo. 

Seas.  Okotsk,  Japan,  Yellow,  Chinese,  Arabian,  Red, 
Mediterranean,  Black,  Caspian  and  Aral: 

Gidfs  and  Bays.  Gulf  of  Tonquin,  Persian  Gulf, 
Gulf  of  Ormus  ; Bay  of  Bengal. 


v a i it r c u ir a j t vfaw. 


iuti 


Straits.  Strait  of  Malacca,  Babelmandei,  and  Behring's 
Strait. 

Lakes.  Aral  and  Baikal. 

Rivers.  Cambodia,  Irawaddy,  Ganges,  Indus,  Eu- 
phrates, Obi,  Yenisei,  Lena,  Kiang-Ku,  Hoang-Ho. 

Minerals.  Gold,  silver,  quicksilver,  lead,  tin,  iron,  copper, 
coal,  salt,  and  precious  stones. 

Divisions.  Asia  is  divided  into  A.,  T.,  P.,  I.  T.,  A.,  H., 
B.,  H.,  F.  I.,  C.,  J.,  and  S. 

Inhabitants.  Asia  is  inhabited  by  a great  variety  of 
races.  The  general  classification  may  be  the  white,  the 
Indian,  and  Negro  races. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Asia  bounded?  2.  What  islands 
near?  3.  What  capes  ? 4.  Peninsulas  ? 5.  Mountains  ? 6.  Deserts  ? 
7.  Seas?  8.  Gulfs  and  bays?  9.  Straits?  10.  Lakes  ? 11.  Rivers? 
12.  What  minerals  are  found  there?  13.  What  are  the  civil  divis- 
ions of  Asia  ? 14.  By  whom  is  it  inhabited  ? 

Review  Lessons  XIII.,  XXXII.,  and  XXXVII, 


LESSON  XLIX. 

ARABIA  AND  TURKEY. 

ARABIA. 

Boundaries.  Arabia  is  bounded  north  by  T.,  east  by  the 
P.  and  O.  Gulfs,  south  by  the  A.  Sea  and  Strait  of  B.,  west 
by  the  R.  Sea. 

Rivers.  None  of  note. 

Desert.  The  Great  Desert. 

Productions.  Aloes,  myrrh,  frankincense,  gumarabic, 
coffee,  pepper,  and  tropical  fruits. 

Chief  Towns.  Mecca  is  celebrated  as  the  birthplace  of 
Mahomet.  It  is  the  principal  resort  for  pilgrims  from  ali 


ASIA. 


107 


Mahometan  nations.  It  has  now  only  half  its  former  num- 
ber of  inhabitants.  Population,  60,000. 

Jidda,  on  the  Red  Sea,  is  the  port  of  Mecca.  It  is  a well- 
fortified  place.  Population,  40,000. 

Medina  contains  the  tomb  of  Mahomet.  The  inhabitants 
live  mostly  by  gifts  from  the  pilgrims.  Population,  8,000. 

Government.  The  government  is  that  of  independent 
chiefs,  called  sheiks.  Each  tribe  is  ruled  by  its  respective 
chief. 

Religion.  Mahometanism.  (See  Turkey  in  Europe.) 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Low.  Learning  and 
morality  are  almost  entirely  neglected. 

Remarks.  Arabia  is  divided  into  Arabia  Petrsea,  Peserta, 
and  Felix.  This  peninsula  has  many  deserts,  and  is  subject  to  a 
destructive  wind,  called  the  Simoom.  The  Arabians,  during  the 
middle  ages,  were  called  Saracens.  They  are  an  ignorant,  bar- 
barous and  warlike  people. 


TURKEY  IN  ASIA. 

Boundaries.  T urkey  is  bounded  north  by  the  B.  Sea 
east  by  P.,  south  by  A.,  west  by  the  M.  Sea. 

Rivers.  The  Tigris  and  Euphrates. 

Mountains.  Ararat  and  Taurus. 

Productions.  Wines,  oil,  silks,  some  grain,  and  tropical 
fruit. 

Chief  Towns.  Jerusalem,  the  ancient  capital  of  Pales- 
tine, is  still  a place  of  great  interest.  It  is  identified  with 
the  most  sacred  associations,  and,  in  fact,  with  the  religious 
history  of  our  race.  It  contains  some  magnificent  churches. 
The  Mosque  of  Omar  stands  on  the  precise  spot  where  the 
ancient  Temple  once  stood. 

Bagdad,  on  the  Tigris,  was  once  a place  of  renown,  but 
is  now  on  the  decline.  Population,  100,000. 

Bassora,  now  going  to  decay,  has  60,000  inhabitants. 

Smyrna,  still  a place  of  great  interest,  has  a population 
of  130,000. 

Palmyra,  once  a splendid  city,  is  now  in  ruins. 


108 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Government.  (See  Turkey  in  Europe.)  It  is  a part  of 
the  same  empire. 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.)  The  Greek,  Armenian,  and 
Nestorian  churches  still  survive  here. 

Education  and  Morals.  Both  are  in  a neglected  state. 

Remarks.  Syria,  or  the  Holy  Land,  is  included  in  this  empire. 
Its  possession  has  recently  been  contested  between  the  Ottoman 
Porte  and  the  Pacha  of  Egypt  Many  ancient  cities  of  renown 
had  their  seat  in  this  country  ; among  which  were  Nineveh,  Troy, 
Babylon,  Balbec,  and  Tyre.  No  trace  of  these  cities  now  remains. 
Silver,  copper,  lead,  and  iron,  are  found  in  this  country. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Arabia  bounded?  2.  What  desert  is 
here?  3.  What  are  the  productions?  4.  Chief  towns?  5.  What 
is  the  government  ? 6.  Religion  ? 7.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

8.  How  is  Turkey  in  Asia  bounded  ? 9.  What  are  the  rivers  ? 
10.  Mountains?  11.  Productions?  12.  Chief  towns?  13.  What 
is  the  government?  14.  Religion?  15.  State  of  education  and 
morals  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  Norway.  2.  Sweden.  3.  Russia.  4.  Po- 
land. 5.  Denmark.  6.  Austria.  7.  Switzerland. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Arabia  ? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Turkey  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Smyrna  to  Hartford? 


LESSON  L . 

PERSIA  AND  INDEPENDENT  TARTARY. 


PERSIA. 


Boundaries.  Persia  is  bounded  north  by  R.,  the  C.  Sea, 
and  I.  T.,  east  by  H.,  A.,  and  B„  south  by  the  P.  Gulf,  west 
by  T. 

River.  The  Tigris. 


ASIA. 


109 


Mountains.  A continuation  of  the  Taurus  chain.  Salt 
Desert. 

Productions.  Grains,  tropical  fruit,  cotton,  rice,  to- 
bacco, wines,  silks,  and  drugs. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Teheran  is  the  capital.  It 
is  situated  on  a dreary  plain,  but  has  some  manufacturing 
interests.  The  Royal  Palace  is  splendid.  Population, 
100,000. 

Ispahan  is  but  a shadow  of  its  former  splendor.  It  has 
still  an  extensive  trade,  and  abounds  in  monuments  of  an- 
cient grandeur.  Population,  180,000. 

Government.  Absolute  monarchy.  (See  Turkey.) 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 

Education  and  Morals.  The  state  of  general  education 
is  good,  compared  with  most  Eastern  nations. 

Remarks.  Persia  was  once  the  seat  of  powerful  empires 
The  surface  is  uneven,  sandy,  and  barren.  The  Persians  are 
fond  of  show,  deceitful,  gay,  and  polite.  Mines  of  iron,  copper, 
lead,  and  quarries  of  excellent  marble,  are  found  here. 


INDEPENDENT  TARTARY. 


Boundaries.  Independent  Tartary  is  bounded  north  by 
R.,  east  by  the  C.  empire,  south  by  H.  and  P.,  west  by  the 
C.  Sea. 

Rivers.  The  Jihon  and  Sihon. 

Mountains.  The  Altai  chain. 

Productions.  But  little  attention  is  paid  to  agriculture. 
The  inhabitants  lead,  for  the  most  part,  a wandering  life. 

Chief  Towns.  Bukharia  has  360  mosques  and  60  col- 
leges. It  is  the  seat  of  Mahometan  learning.  Its  manu- 
factures and  commerce  are  extensive.  Population,  80,000. 

Samarcand,  the  former  capital  of  the  empire  of  Tamer- 
lane, is  a place  of  great  business  and  commerce.  Popula- 
tion, 55,000. 

Government.  (See  Arabia.) 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 


110 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Education  and  Morals.  (See  Arabia.)  The  mass  of  the 
people  are  illiterate  and  vicious. 

Remarks.  This  country,  as  is  well  known,  was  once  the 
seat  of  powerful  empires.  The  climate  is  agreeable.  The  in- 
habitants lead  a wandering  and  predatory  life.  Some  parts  of 
this  country  are  described  as  being  very  fertile  and  populous. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Persia  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers  ? 3.  What  are  the  mountains?  4.  What  are  the  capital  and 
chief  towns  ? 5.  What  is  the  government  ? 6.  Religion  ? 7.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 8.  How  is  Independent  Tartary  bounded  ? 

9.  What  are  its  rivers?  10.  Mountains?  11.  Chief  towns? 
12.  What  is  the  government?  13.  Religion?  14.  Education  and 
morals  ? 

Review  the  first  six  lessons  of  Part  I. 

Second  Course,  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Persia? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Tartary  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Samarcand  to  Cape  Town  ? 


LESSON  LI. 

AFGHANISTAN,  HERAT,  AND  BELOOCHISTAN. 
AFGHANISTAN. 

Boundaries.  Afghanistan  is  bounded  north  by  H.  and 
I.  T.,  east  by  C.  and  H.,  south  by  B.,  west  by  P. 

River.  The  Indus. 

Mountains.  The  Himmaleh  Mountains. 

Productions.  (See  Persia.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Cabul  is  regarded  as  the 
capital.  It  is  well  built  — has  a fine  climate  and  consider- 
able trade.  Population,  70,000. 


ASIA. 


Ill 


Candahar  has  100,000  inhabitants. 

Ghizni  has  about  8,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  Each  tribe  maintains  a separate  govern- 
ment, which  is  substantially  republican.  The  emperor 
or  king  of  the  Afghans  exercises  no  power  over  the  tribes, 
except  to  nominate  their  chiefs. 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Persia.)  Nearly  all  are 
taught  to  read  and  write. 

Remarks.  Afghanistan  resembles  Persia  in  respect  to  its 
surface,  soil,  and  climate.  It  is  a new  kingdom,  comprising  what 
was  once  called  East  Persia.  The  Afghans  are  bold,  fond  of 
sports,  and  of  hunting.  They  are  courteous  and  hospitable. 


HERAT. 


Boundaries.  Herat  is  bounded  north  by  I.  T.,  south- 
east by  A.,  west  by  P. 

Productions.  (See  Afghanistan.) 

Chief  Towns.  Herat  is  a commercial  and  flourishing 
town.  Population,  100,000. 

Balk  is  an  important  place. 

Government.  (See  Afghanistan.) 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Afghanistan.) 


EELOOCHISTAN. 

Boundaries.  Beloochistan  is  bounded  north  by  A.,  east 
by  H.,  south  by  the  A.  Sea,  west  by  P. 

River.  The  Indus. 

Productions.  But  little  attention  is  paid  lo  agriculture. 
The  inhabitants  subsist  partly  by  hunting  and  plunder. 

Chief  Towns.  Kelat  is  the  seat  of  the  sedar.  It  has 
20,000  inhabitants. 

Gundava  is  well  built,  and  has  17,000  inhabitants. 


112 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


Government.  (See  Afghanistan.) 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 

Education  and  3Iorals.  (See  Arabia.) 

QUESTIONS.  1 . How  is  Afghanistan  bounded  ? 2.  Whatriver? 
3.  What  are  the  mountains?  4.  Productions?  5.  What  are  the 
chief  towns  ? 6.  What  is  the  government  ? 7.  Religion  ? 8.  State 

of  education  and  morals?  9.  How  is  Herat  bounded?  10.  What 
are  the  productions?  11.  Chief  towns?  12.  What  is  the  govern- 
ment? 13.  Religion?  14.  Education  and  morals?  15.  How  is 
Beloochistan  bounded ? 16.  What  river?  17.  What  are  the  chief 
towns  ? 18.  What  is  the  government  ? 19.  Religion  ? 20.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  the  last  six  lessons  of  Part  1. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Af- 
ghanistan ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated?  Which  way  is 
each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Beloochistan?  Where  is  each  town  situated? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest?  Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Cabul  to  Boston  ? 


LESSON  Eli. 

HINDOOSTAN  AND  FARTHER  INDIA. 

HINDOOSTAN. 

Boundaries.  Hindoostan  is  bounded  north-east  by  the  C. 
empire,  south-east  by  F.  I.  and  the  Bay  of  B.,  south-west 
by  the  A.  Sea,  north-west  by  B.  and  A. 

Rivers.  The  Indus  and  Ganges. 

Mountains.  The  Himmaleh  Mountains. 

Productions.  Cotton,  cocoa,  rice,  sugar,  opium,  silks. 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Calcutta,  the  capital  of  Ben- 
gal, is  one  of  the  largest  commercial  cities  in  Asia.  It  has 
great  splendor.  Population,  600,000. 

Delhi,  once  a splendid  city,  is  now  much  reduced. 

Dacca  has  200,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  Arabia.)  The  chiefs  possess  des- 


ASIA. 


113 


potic  power.  The  British  East  India  Company  has  a 
commercial  and  political  control  over  this  vast  territory. 
Its  agents  are  responsible  to  the  crown. 

Religion.  The  religion  of  the  Hindoos  is  paganism. 
Their  sacred  books  are  called  Shasters.  Their  priests  are 
called  Brahmins.  They  worship  deified  heroes,  and  a great 
variety  of  gods. 

Education  and  Morals.  Poor.  Society  exists  here  in 
four  distinct  castes.  The  lowest  caste  are  held  in  ignorance, 
poverty,  and  servitude.  The  next  caste  conduct  the  busi- 
ness and  commercial  transactions.  The  caste  next  higher 
hold  the  civil  and  military  offices.  The  highest  caste  in- 
clude the  learned  men  and  the  priests. 

Remarks.  The  soil  here  is  good;  the  climate  excellent. 
The  banian  tree  is  a great  curiosity.  The  branches  extend  to 
the  earth,  to  which  they  become  attached  by  new  roots,  and  from 
these  other  trunks  are  formed.  One  tree  often  forms  a large 
grove.  Iron,  copper,  and  diamonds,  are  obtained  here. 


FARTHER  INDIA. 

Boundaries.  Farther  India  is  bounded  north  by  the  C. 
empire,  east  by  the  C.  Sea,  south  by  the  C.  Sea  and  the 
Strait  of  Malacca,  west  by  the  Bay  of  B.  and  H. 

Rivers.  The  Irawaddy  and  Cambodia. 

Productions.  (See  Hindoostan.) 

Chief  Towns.  Ava  abounds  in  heathen  temples.  The 
population  is  100,000.  Hue  has  100,000;  Bankok,  90,000; 
Umerapoora,  30,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  This  vast  country  is  divided  into  several 
provinces,  each  maintaining  a separate  government.  The 
“ British  East  India  Company  ” holds  possessions  here 

Religion.  (See  Hindoostan.) 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Hindoostan.) 

Remarks.  This  region  includes  the  Birman  empire,  Siam, 
Malacca,  Cambodia,  Cochin-China,  and  other  provinces.  But  little 
is  known  of  this  country.  Its  minerals  are  gold,  silver,  tin,  iron, 
copper,  and  precious  stones. 

10* 


114 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


QUESTIONS.  1 . How  is  Hindoostan  bounded  ? 2.  What  are 
the  rivers?  3.  Productions?  4.  Chief  towns?  5.  What  is  the 
government?  6.  Religion?  7.  Education  and  morals?  8.  How  is 
Farther  India  bounded?  9.  What  are  the  rivers?  10.  Produc- 
tions? 11.  Chief  towns?  12.  What  is  the  government?  13.  Re- 
ligion? 14.  Education  and  morals  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  Maine.  2.  New  Hampshire.  3.  Vermont. 
4.  Massachusetts.  5.  Rhode  Island.  6.  Connecticut.  7.  New 
York  8.  New  Jersey.  9.  Delaware.  10.  Maryland.  11.  Penn- 
sylvania. 12.  Ohio.  13.  Michigan. 

Second  Course.  Whatremarks  were  made  in  respect  to  Hindos- 
tan  ? Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each 
from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Farther  India?  Where  is  each  town  situated  ? 
Which  way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What 
else  of  interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in 
going  from  Calcutta  to  Philadelphia  ? 


LESSON  L I 1 1. 
CHINESE  AND  JAPAN  EMPIRES. 
CHINESE  EMPIRE. 


Thibet  and  Chinese  Tartary  are  included  in  this  empire. 
Boundaries.  This  empire  is  bounded  north  by  S.,  east 
by  the  Sea  of  J.,  the  Y.  Sea,  and  the  P.  Ocean,  south  by 
F.  I.  and  H.,  west  by  I.  T.  and  A. 

Rivers.  The  Amour,  Hoang-Ho,  and  the  Kiang-Ku. 
Mountains.  The  Altai  and  Ilimmaleh. 

Productions.  Tea,  camphor,  rice,  and  tropical  fruits. 
Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Pekin,  the  capital,  is  one  of 
the  largest  cities  on  the  globe.  It  has  not,  however,  the 
beauty,  splendor,  and  commerce,  of  most  European  cities. 
Population,  1,500,000. 

Canton  is  less  populous,  but  more  splendid,  than  Pekin. 
Population,  1,000,000. 

Nankin  has  500,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  A patriarchal  or  limited  monarchy. 


ASIA. 


115 


The  emperor  is  styled  the  “ Son  of  Heaven,”  and  exercises 
a sort  of  paternal  control  over  his  subjects. 

Religion.  Boodhism,  which  is  but  another  development 
of  Hindooism,  or  the  religion  of  the  Bramins.  The  higher 
and  better  educated  classes,  however,  profess  the  religion 
or  philosophy  of  Confucius. 

Education  and  Morals.  The  arts  and  sciences  are,  to 
some  extent,  cultivated  here.  Poetry,  geography,  history, 
mathematics,  and  painting,  are  attended  to  by  the  higher 
classes ; but  general  education  and  morality  are  in  a 
wretched  state. 

Remarks.  China  is  supposed  to  contain  between  3 and 
400,000,000  inhabitants.  It  contains  over  4,000  walled  cities. 
The  “Chinese  Wall”  is  one  of  the  most  stupendous  works  ever 
performed  by  man.  It  is  1,500  miles  in  length,  30  feet  high,  15 
broad.  The  Imperial  Canal  is  1,400  miles  in  length. 


JAPAN  EMPIRE. 

Japan  consists  of  several  islands  lying  between  the  P. 
Ocean  and  the  Sea  of  J. 

Productions.  Rice,  grain,  tobacco,  and  tropical  fruits. 

Capital  and  Chief  Toions.  Jeddo,  the  capital,  is  one  of 
the  largest  and  most  populous  cities  in  the  world.  The 
Imperial  Palace  is  a magnificent  structure.  Population, 
1,300,000. 

Meaco  is  noted  for  its  literature  and  manufactures.  Pop- 
ulation, 500,000. 

Government.  Absolute  monarchy. 

Religion.  Various  kinds  of  paganism.  The  religion  of 
Sinto,  the  doctrines  of  Confucius,  and  Boodhism,  have  their 
devotees  here. 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Good.  The  children 
are  well  educated  and  governed. 

Remarks.  The  Japanese  are  the  most  civilized  and  refined 
nation  in  Asia.  Their  commercial  intercourse  is  restricted  to  a 
very  few  nations.  The  soil  and  climate  are  good. 


116 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


SIBERIA,  OR  ASIATIC  RUSSIA. 

This  vast  region  lies  between  the  Chinese  empire  and 
the  A.  Ocean,  embracing  nearly  one  half  of  the  territory 
of  Asia.  This  region  abounds  in  wild  animals  of  almost 
all  kinds.  These  animals  yield  fine  furs.  Almost  all  kinds 
of  minerals  and  precious  stones  abound  here.  The  inhab- 
itants are  mostly  uncivilized.  They  are  subject  to  the 
Russian  government.  The  religion  is  Mahometanism, 
Greek  Church,  and  paganism. 

Rivers  and  mountains  are  numerous. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  China  bounded?  2.  What  are  the 
rivers?  3.  Mountains?  4.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief  towns? 
5.  What  is  the  government?  6.  Religion?  7.  State  of  education 
and  morals  ? 8.  Where  does  Japan  lie  ? 9.  What  are  the  produc- 
tions? 10.  Capital  and  chief  towns  ? 11.  What  is  the  government  ? 

12.  Religion?  13.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 14.  Where  does 

Siberia  lie  ? 15.  With  what  does  it  abound  ? 16.  What  is  said  of 

the  inhabitants  ? 

Review.  Describe,  1.  Indiana.  2.  Illinois.  3.  Missouri.  4.  Ar- 
kansas. 5.  Kentucky.  6.  Tennessee.  7.  Virginia.  8.  North 
Carolina.  9.  South  Carolina.  10.  Georgia. 

Second  Course.  What  remarks  were  made  in  respect  to  China? 
Where  is  each  principal  town  situated  ? Which  way  is  each  from 
the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of  interest  ? 

What  was  said  of  Japan  ? Where  is  each  town  situated  ? Which 
way  is  each  from  the  capital  ? Describe  the  waters.  What  else  of 
interest  ? Which  way,  and  through  what,  would  you  sail  in  going 
from  Pekin  to  Dublin  ? 


LESSON  LIV. 

AFRICA. 


Boundaries.  Africa  is  bounded  north  by  the  M.  Sea, 
east  by  the  R.  Sea  and  I.  Ocean,  south  by  the  S.  Ocean, 
west  by  the  A.  Ocean. 


AFRICA. 


117 


Islands.  Madagascar,  St.  Helena,  St.  Thomas,  Canary 
Isles,  and  the  islands  of  the  M.  Sea. 

Capes.  Guardafui,  Corrientes,  Cape  of  Good  Hope, 
Cape  Palmas,  and  Cape  Verd. 

Isthmus  of  Suez. 

Mountains.  Mountains  of  the  Moon,  and  Mt.  Atlas. 

Desert.  The  Desert  of  Sahara. 

Seas.  Red  and  Mediterranean  Seas. 

Gulf  of  Guinea. 

Channel  and  Straits.  Mozambique  Channel,  and  the 
Straits  of  Babelmandel  and  Gibraltar. 

Rivers.  The  Nile  and  branches,  Orange,  Congo,  Niger, 
Gambia,  and  Senegal. 

Minerals.  Gold,  silver,  copper,  iron,  tin,  and  salt. 

Divisions.  Africa  is  divided  into  B.  S.,  E.,  N.,  A.,  Eastern 
A.,  Southern  A..  Western  A.,  Central  A.,  and  the  Great 
Desert. 

Inhabitants.  Africa  is  inhabited  mostly  by  the  Negro 
race. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Africa  bounded?  2.  What  islands 
near?  3.  Capes?  4.  Isthmus?  5.  Mountains?  6.  Desert? 
7.  Seas?  8.  Gulf?  9.  Channel  and  straits?  10.  What  lakes? 
11.  Rivers?  12.  What  minerals?  13.  What  divisions?  14.  By 
whom  is  Africa  inhabited  ? 

Review  Lessons  XIII.,  XXXIL,  XXXVII.,  and  XLVII. 


LESSON  LV, 

EGYPT,  NUBIA,  AND  ABYSSINIA. 

EGYPT. 

Boundaries.  Egypt  is  bounded  north  by  the  M.  Sea, 
east  by  A.  and  the  R.  Sea,  south  by  N.,  west  by  B.  and  the 
Great  Desert, 


118 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


River.  The  Nile. 

Productions.  Cotton,  sugar,  indigo,  rice,  grains.  (See 
Mexico.) 

Capital  and  Chief  Towns.  Cairo  is  the  capital.  It  is 
irregularly  built.  The  houses  are  mostly  small,  and  con- 
structed of  mud.  It  has  an  extensive  traffic  with  Asia  and 
Africa  by  caravans.  Population,  300,000. 

Alexandria  is  but  a shadow  of  its  former  splendor.  Here 
are  Pompey’s  Pillar,  a splendid  Obelisk,  and  the  Catacombs. 
Population,  once  600,000,  is  now  but  25,000. 

Damietta  has  25,000  inhabitants. 

Government.  Egypt  is  nominally  dependent  on  Turkey, 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Low.  The  mass  of 
the  people  are  sunk  in  ignorance. 

Remarks.  Egypt  was  anciently  styled  the  birthplace  of 
the  sciences  and  the  arts;  but  the  scale  has  turned.  The  relics 
of  ancient  grandeur  and  power  still  remain.  The  Pyramids, 
Catacombs,  and  other  works  of  art,  are  stupendous.  The  Nile  is 
the  source  of  fertility  to  this  country.  It  overflows  a wide  region 
regularly  every  year.  In  the  dry  season,  — for  it  seldom  rains  here, 
— the  land  is  watered  by  canals  from  the  Nile,  and  by  heavy  dews. 


NUBIA. 

Boundaries.  Nubia  is  bounded  north  by  E.,  east  by  the 
R.  Sea,  south  by  A.,  west  by  the  Great  Desert. 

Rivers.  The  Nile  and  its  branches. 

Mountains.  The  Mountains  of  the  Moon. 

Productions.  Tropical  fruits,  gums,  and  some  grain. 

Chief  Towns.  Sennaar  was  once  a place  of  note.  It  is 
now  a mass  of  huts  and  cabins.  Population,  10,000. 

Suakim  is  one  of  the  great  slave  marts,  and  has  8,000 
inhabitants. 

Dongola,  once  the  largest  city  in  Nubia,  is  now  reduced 
to  a few  hundred  inhabitants. 

Government.  (See  Arabia.) 

Religion.  Mahometan  and  Pagan 


AFRICA. 


119 


State  of  Education  and  Morals.  Poor.  Learning  and 
refinement  are  generally  neglected. 

Remarks.  Sennaar  and  Dongola  are  the  principal  states  into 
which  this  country  is  divided.  A destructive  wind  from  the 
desert,  called  the  Simoom,  is  often  felt  here.  When  inhaled,  it 
causes  instant  death.  Nubia  abounds  in  magnificent  ruins. 
Gold  and  other  metals  are  found  here. 


ABYSSINIA. 

Boundaries.  Abyssinia  is  bounded  north  by  N.,  east  by 
the  R.  Sea  and  Strait  of  B.,  south  by  A.,  west  by  the 
unexplored  regions. 

J Rivers.  The  branches  of  the  Nile. 

Mountains.  The  Mountains  of  the  Moon. 

Productions.  (See  Nubia.)  They  manufacture  iron 
and  brass. 

Chief  Towns.  Gondar  has  over  30,000  inhabitants. 

Axum  is  a place  of  some  note. 

Government.  (See  Arabia.) 

Religion.  (See  Greece.)  Heathenism,  in  some  parts, 
prevails. 

Education  and  Morals.  (See  Arabia.) 

Remarks.  This  country  was  anciently  called  Ethiopia.  The 
Abyssinians  are  an  ignorant  and  barbarous  people.  The  country 
is  rich  in  minerals.  The  soil  and  climate  are  good. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Egypt  bounded?  2.  What  river? 
3.  What  are  the  productions?  4.  What  are  the  capital  and  chief 
towns  ? 5.  What  is  the  government  ? 6.  Religion  ? 7.  State  of 

education  and  morals  ? 8.  How  is  Nubia  bounded  ? 9.  What  rivers  ? 

10.  Mountains?  11.  What  are  the  chief  towns?  12.  What  is  the 
government?  13.  Religion?  14.  State  of  education  and  morals? 
15.  How  is  Abyssinia  bounded?  16.  What  river?  17.  Productions? 
18.  Mountains?  191  What  are  the  chief  towns?  20.  What  is  the 
government  ? 21.  Religion  ? 22.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  each  country  in  Asia. 

Second  Course.  (What  was  said  of  Egypt  r Of  Nubia?  Abys- 
sinia ? What  isthmus  :oins  Egypt  with  Asia  ? What  sea  and  strait 


120 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


near  Nubia?  Which  way  is  Cairo  from  New  York  ? Potosi?  From 
Liverpool?  From  Pekin?  What  waters  would  you  sail  through  in 
going  from  Dongola  to  Quebec?  To  Albany?  Monte  Video? 
London?  St.  Petersburg?) 


LESSON  LVI. 
THE  BARBARY  STATES. 


These  are  several  states  lying  upon  the  Mediterrane- 
an Sea. 

Barca  is  bounded  north  by  the  M.  Sea,  east  by  E.,  south 
by  the  Great  Desert,  and  west  by  T. 

Tripoli  is  bounded  north  by  the  M.  Sea,  east  by  B.,  south 
by  the  G.  D.,  west  by  T. 

Tunis  is  bounded  north  by  the  M.  Sea,  east  by  T.,  south 
by  the  G.  D.,  west  by  A. 

Algiers  is  bounded  north  by  the  M.  Sea,  east  by  T., 
south  by  the  G.  D.,  west  by  M. 

Morocco  is  bounded  north  by  the  Strait  of  G.,  east  by 
A.,  south  by  the  G.  D.,  west  by  the  A.  Ocean. 

Fez  is  a province  of  Morocco. 

Rivers.  None  of  note. 

Mountains.  The  Atlas  chain. 

Productions.  Sugar,  cotton,  grain,  beans,  lentiles,  and 
tropical  fruits. 

Capitals.  Derne  is  the  capital  of  Barca.  Tripoli  is  the 
capital  of  Tripoli.  Tunis  is  the  capital  of  Tunis.  Algiers 
is  the  capital  of  Algiers.  Morocco  is  the  capital  of  Mo- 
rocco. 

Government.  Each  state  has  a separate  government. 
The  power  of  the  prince  is  absolute,  except  in  Algiers, 
which  is  subject  to  France. 

Religion.  (See  Arabia.) 

State  of  Education  and  Morals.  These  are  in  a wretch- 
ed condition. 


AFRICA. 


121 


Remarks.  These  states  were  anciently  known  as  the  seats 
of  powerful  empires.  The  climate  here  is  very  fine.  The  inhabit- 
ants are  warlike  and  piratical.  This  coast  is  infested  with  fero- 
cious animals  and  numberless  insects.  The  lion  is  found  here. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  How  is  Barca  bounded?  2.  How  is  Tripoli 
bounded?  3.  Tunis?  4.  Algiers?  5.  Morocco?  6.  What  chain 
of  mountains  in  these  states  ? 7.  What  are  the  productions  of  these 

states?  8.  What  are  the  capitals?  9.  What  is  the  government? 
10.  The  religion?  11.  State  of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  each  country  in  Europe. 

Second  Course.  (What  is  said  of  these  states  ? How  are  the 
capitals  situated  ? Mention  the  chief  towns.  Where  are  they  sit- 
uated ?) 


LESSON  L VII. 

THE  GREAT  DESERT,  CENTRAL  AND  WESTERN 
AFRICA. 

THE  GREAT  DESERT. 

The  Great  Desert  lies  between  the  Barbary  States  and 
Central  Africa.  It  is  a vast  sea  of  moving  sand,  inter- 
spersed with  islands  or  oases  of  verdant  lands.  These 
deserts  are  traversed  by  caravans,  and  are  inhabited  by  a 
fierce,  predatory,  and  unsubdued  race  of  men. 

Fezzan  is  an  oasis  that  lies  south  of  Tripoli.  Mourzouk, 
the  capital,  is  the  centre  of  the  caravan  trade  in  Africa. 


CENTRAL  AFRICA,  OR  N1GR1T1A. 

This  country  lies  between  the  Great  Desert  and  the 
Mountains  of  the  Moon.  It  is  divided  into  several  distinct 
governments.  Darfour  is  the  most  easterly,  Bambarra  the 

11 


122 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


most  westerly.  Between  them  are  Tirnbuctoo,  Bergoo, 
Houssa,  Bornou,  and  other  minor  states. 

Rivers.  The  Niger  and  its  branches. 

Mountains.  The  Mountains  of  the  Moon. 

Productions.  Cotton,  lotus,  sugar-cane,  rice,  grain,  and 
tropical  fruits. 

Towns.  Sego,  the  capital  of  Bambarra,  has  20,000  in- 
habitants. 

Tirnbuctoo,  the  capital  of  a state  of  this  name,  is  a 
commercial  place,  situated  on  the  desert.  Population, 
15,000. 

Sackatoo  is  a place  of  much  business.  Kouka,  Kobbe, 
Kashna,  are  each  considerable  towns. 

Government.  Independent  chiefs.  The  princes  exer- 
cise an  arbitrary,  though  some  of  them  a patriarchal,  power 
over  their  subjects. 

Religion.  Mahometan  and  pagan. 

Education  and  Morals.  In  a neglected  state. 

Remarks.  But  little  is  known  of  this  vast  region.  The  un- 
healthiness of  the  climate,  the  barbarous  character  of  the  natives, 
together  with  the  danger  arising  from  ferocious  animals  and 
poisonous  insects  that  infest  this  country,  render  it  very  haz- 
ardous for  foreigners  to  traverse  these  regions.  Important  dis- 
coveries have,  however,  been  made  recently  in  this  country,  by 
which  the  source  and  mouth  of  the  Niger,  the  situation  of  several 
cities,  the  quality  of  the  soil,  and  the  character  of  the  inhabitants, 
are  ascertained.  The  land  is  fertile,  but  much  neglected.  Ivory, 
gold,  and  other  minerals,  are  found  here.  A large  traffic  in  slaves 
is  carried  on. 


WESTERN  AFRICA. 

This  country  lies  on  the  coast,  between  the  Great  Desert 
and  Southern  Africa.  It  embraces  Sene-Gambia,  Sierra 
Leone,  Liberia,  Guinea,  Loango,  Congo,  Angola,  Benguela. 
Sierra  Leone  is  an  English  colony,  and  Liberia  an  American 
colony.  These  colonies  are  made  up  mostly  of  emanci- 
pated slaves  and  free  negroes  from  England  and  America. 

Rivers.  The  Niger  and  its  branches,  and  the  Senegal. 

Mountains.  The  Mountains  of  the  Moon. 


AFRICA. 


123 


Productions.  (See  Nigritia.) 

Towns.  Monrovia,  Teemboo,  Coomassic,  Benin,  and 
Dahomey. 

Government.  (See  Nigritia.) 

Religion.  Paganism  and  Mahometanism. 

Education  and  3Iorals.  But  very  little  attention  is  paid 
to  either.  The  people  are  timid,  supine,  and  indolent. 

Remarks.  This  country  lies  along  upon  the  Atlantic  coast,  ex- 
tending from  the  Great  Desert  nearly  to  Cape  Good  Hope.  It  is  the 
theatre  of  the  African  slave  trade.  Chiefs  often  wage  war  upon 
each  other,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  captives  to  sell  into 
slavery.  Gold,  ivory,  and  valuable  gums,  are  abundant  here. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  Where  does  the  Great  Desert  lie  ? 2.  What  is 
said  of  it  ? 3.  What  is  said  of  Fezzan  ? 4.  What  is  the  capital  ? 
5.  Where  does  Central  Africa  lie  ? 6.  Mention  the  several  prov- 
inces. 7.  What  rivers  ? 8.  What  mountains  ? 9.  Productions  ? 

10.  What  are  the  towns?  11.  What  is  the  government?  12.  Re- 
ligion? 13.  Education  and  morals?  14.  Where  does  Western 
Africa  lie  ? 15.  What  provinces  does  it  embrace  ? 16.  What  col 

onies  ? 17.  What  is  said  of  them?  18.  What  rivers?  19.  What 

mountains?  20.  Productions?  21.  Towns?  22.  What  is  the  gov- 
ernment ? 23.  Religion  ? 24.  Education  and  morals  ? 

Review  each  country  in  Asia. 

Second  Course.  (What  was  said  of  Central  Africa  ? Of  Western 
Africa?  Mention  the  provinces  of  each,  in  course.  The  chief  towns 
of  each,  in  course.) 


LESSON  LVIII. 

SOUTHERN  AND  EASTERN  AFRICA. 

SOUTHERN  AFRICA. 

South  Africa  lies  between  the  Atlantic  and  the  Indian 
Oceans,  in  the  southern  extremity  of  Africa.  In  the  north- 
west part  of  this  region  are  Cimbebas  and -the  country  of 


124 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


the  Hottentots ; in  the  southern  extremity,  Cape  Colony ; 
and  in  the  north-eastern,  Caffraria. 

River.  The  Orange. 

Mountains.  Table  Mountains. 

Productions.  Wheat,  barley,  corn,  hemp,  flax. 

Chief  Towns.  The  principal  towns  are  Lattakoo,  Kur- 
reechane,  and  Cape  Town,  the  capital  of  Cape  Colony. 

Government.  Cape  Colony  is  subject  to  the  British 
crown.  The  other  countries  have  no  government  except 
that  of  independent  chiefs. 

Religion.  Cape  Colony  is  settled  mostly  by  Europeans, 
who  are  Protestants.  They  have  planted  a number  of 
missionary  stations  among  the  Hottentots,  Caffres,  and  the 
surrounding  people,  who  are  sunk  generally  to  the  lowest 
degree  of  degradation. 

Education  and  Morals.  These  are  very  much  neglected 
in  the  English  province,  and  wholly  so  in  the  other  parts. 

Remarks.  Cape  Colony  is  owned  by  the  English.  There  are 
English  and  Dutch  settlements  here.  It  is  a convenient  stopping- 
place  for  ships  on  their  voyages  to  the  East  Indies.  The  land  is 
excellent,  and  the  climate  agreeable.  The  Hottentots  are  a de- 
graded race  of  beings,  living  in  most  respects  like  the  brutes. 
Missionary  efforts  here,  however,  have  met  with  remarkable 
success. 


EASTERN  AFRICA. 

This  country  lies  between  South  Africa  and  Abyssinia, 
upon  the  Indian  Ocean. 

Monomotapa  lies  between  South  Africa  and  Mozambique, 
on  the  coast  of  the  Indian  Ocean. 

Mozambique  lies  farther  north,  on  the  channel  of  that 
name. 

Zanguebar  lies  still  farther  north,  on  the  coast. 

Adel  and  Ajan  lie  between  Abyssinia  and  the  Indian 
Ocean. 

Productions.  Drugs,  oil,  pepper,  frankincense,  and  some 
grains. 

Towns.  Magadoxo  is  the  capital  of  the  province  of  that 
name,  which  is, a part  of  Zanguebar. 


AFRICA. 


125 


Melinda,  Mozambique,  and  Sofala,  all  situated  on  the 
coast,  are  the  principal  towns. 

Government.  (See  Nigritia.) 

Religion.  In  the  northern  part,  the  inhabitants  are  Ma- 
hometans; in  the  southern,  they  have  no  settled  religion 
or  law. 

Education  and  Morals.  These  are  in  a wretched  state. 

Remarks.  Very  little  is  known  of  this  portion  of  Africa.  The 
inhabitants  are  exceedingly  degraded.  Valuable  gums,  feathers, 
ivory,  gold,  nuts,  sugar,  and  slaves,  are  the  principal  articles  of 
traffic. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  Where  does  Southern  Africa  lie  ? 2.  What  is 
the  principal  river ? 3.  What  are  the  mountains?  4.  Productions? 
5.  Towns?  6.  What  is  the  government?  7.  Religion?  8.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 9.  Where  does  Eastern  Africa  lie  ? 

10.  Mention  the  countries  in  order.  11.  What  are  the  productions  ? 
12.  Towns  ? 13.  What  is  the  government?  14.  Religion  ? 15.  State 
of  education  and  morals  ? 

Review  each  country  in  Africa. 

Second  Course.  (What  was  said  of  Southern  Africa  ? Of  East- 
ern Africa  ? What  cape  south  of  Africa  ? Of  Madagascar  ? What 
lake  in  this  region  ?) 


LESSON  LIX. 

OCEANICA. 

Under  this  head  are  included,  1.  Malaysia,  embracing 
the  islands  between  Asia  and  Australia  ; 2.  Austral- 
asia, embracing  Australia  and  the  contiguous  islands ; 
3.  Polynesia,  embracing  the  other  groups  of  islands  in  the 
Pacific  Ocean. 

These  islands  are  for  the  most  part  in  a state  of  uncivil- 
ization. The  inhabitants  generally  lead  a predatory  and 
roving  life,  without  the  restraints  of  law  or  religion.  As  a 
11  * 


126 


PARTICULAR  VIEW. 


race,  they  are  peculiar  in  form,  features,  and  color.  There 
are  peculiarities  even  in  the  animal  and  vegetable  king- 
doms. Nature  seems  to  have  changed  her  order  in  these 
vast  islands.  In  some  parts  of  Australia,  civilization 
has  commenced  its  work.  England  has  possessions  and 
colonies  there,  and  a place  of  banishment  for  her  crim- 
inals. The  productions  are  valuable  woods,  spices,  dye- 
stuffs, and  the  most  excellent  fruits.  Schools  and  mission- 
ary stations  have  been  established  in  some  of  these  islands ; 
and  great  advancement  has  been  made,  especially  in  the 
Sandwich  and  Society  Islands,  in  civilization  and  in  moral 
and  religious  improvement.  These  islands  abound  in  vol- 
canoes. 

QUESTIONS.  1.  What  islands  does  Oceanica  embrace  ? 2.  What 
is  said  of  the  inhabitants  ? 3.  In  what  are  they  peculiar  ? 4.  What 
is  said  of  New  Holland  ? 5.  What  interests  have  the  English  there  ? 
6.  What  are  the  productions  ? 7.  What  is  said  of  the  schools  and 
missionary  stations  ? 8.  With  what  do  these  islands  abound  ? 

Review  Africa. 

Second  Course.  (Which  way  is  each  island,  embraced  under  this 
name,  from  New  Holland  ? What  is  the  climate  of  New  Zealand  ? 
Of  the  Sandwich  Islands  ? What  towns  in  New  Holland  ? What 
gulf  and  straits  touch  this  island  ?) 


LESSON  Li  X . 


QUESTIONS.  1.  What  is  an  empire  ? 2.  A confederacy  ? 

3.  A republic  ? 4.  A monarchy  ? 5.  A limited  monarchy  ? 6.  An 
absolute  monarchy  ? 7.  Describe  Popery.  8.  Protestantism.  9.  The 
Greek  Church.  10.  Mahometanism.  11.  Paganism.  12.  Mention 
all  those  countries  where  the  state  of  education  and  morals  is  good. 
13.  Middling.  14.  Poor.  15.  Neglected  wholly.  16.  Mention 
those  countries  whose  productions  are  cotton,  rice,  tobacco,  sugar, 
coffee,  or  that  have,  in  general,  this  class  of  productions.  17.  Men- 
tion those  that  produce  wheat,  grain,  beef,  butter,  &c.  18.  Furs, 

timber,  &c. 


QUESTIONS. 


127 


LESSON  L X I. 


QUESTIONS.  1.  Mention  those  countries  that  are  empires. 
2.  Confederacies.  3.  Republics.  4.  Monarchies.  5.  Dependencies. 
6.  Those  that  are  governed  by  chiefs.  7.  Mention  those  countries 
whose  religion  is  Protestant.  8.  Roman  Catholic.  9.  Greek 
Church.  10.  Mahometanism.  11.  Paganism.  12.  Mention  the 
ten  longest  rivers  in  the  world.  13.  The  ten  next  in  length.  14.  The 
ten  next.  15.  The  next  ten.  16.  Mention  the  five  principal  chains 
of  mountains.  17.  The  five  next  in  importance.  18.  The  next  five. 
— The  teacher  can  extend  questions  of  this  kind  to  any  length. 


GEOGRAPHY 


PART  III. 

MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


LESSON  I. 

THE  DIFFERENT  RACES  OF  MEN. 

The  human  family  form,  in  fact,  but  one  species.  But 
custom,  climate,  or  other  circumstances  and  providences, 
have  conspired  to  divide  the  human  family  into  distinct 
races.  These  races  of  men  have  been  variously  classified. 
The  most  philosophical  classification  is,  probably,  the  fol- 
lowing : — 

1st.  The  Caucasian  Race,  having  the  head  and  the 
general  form  well  proportioned,  and  the  skin  white. 

2d.  The  Mongolian  Race,  having  the  head  nearly  square, 
the  cheek  bones  prominent,  the  face  broad  and  flattened, 
and  the  skin  tawny. 

3d.  The  American  Race,  having  the  cheek  bones  high, 
the  forehead  low,  the  face  broad,  the  eyes  sunken,  and  the 
skin  a reddish  yellow. 

4th.  The  Malay  Race,  having  the  features  of  the  two 
preceding  races,  with  the  forehead  slightly  arched,  the 
upper  jaw  projecting,  and  the  skin  a deep  brown. 

oth.  The  Negro  Race,  having  the  head  narrow,  the  fore- 
head convex,  the  nostrils  wide  and  flat,  the  jaws  length* 
ened,  the  lips  thick,  and  tire  skin  black. 


HISTORY. 


129 


The  Caucasian  or  white  race  includes  most  of  the  Eu- 
ropean and  American  nations;  also,  the  Turks,  Arabians, 
Hindoos,  Persians,  Circassians,  Georgians,  Jews,  Moors, 
and  some  other  less  important  nations. 

The  Mongolian  race  includes  most  of  the  inhabitants  of 
Eastern  Asia;  viz.,  the  Chinese,  Japanese,  Birmese,  and 
some  other  nations  in  the  north  of  Europe  and  America. 

The  Malay  race  inhabits  the  peninsula  of  Malacca,  Cey- 
lon, and  the  islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

The  Ethiopian  or  Negro  race  is  found  mostly  in  Africa. 

The  American  race  includes  the  aboriginal  inhabitants 
of  North  and  South  America,  and  some  others. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  the  human  family  ? How  do 
they  now  exist  ? Describe  the  Caucasian  race.  The  Mongolian 
race.  The  American  race.  The  Malay  race.  The  Negro  race. 
What  nations  does  the  Caucasian  race  include  ? What  the  Mongo- 
lian race  ? What  countries  do  the  Malays  inhabit?  Where  is  the 
Ethiopian  race  found  ? Where  the  American  race  ? 


LESSON  II. 

CONDITIONS  OF  SOCIETY. 

The  races  of  men  are  found  in  a savage,  half-civilized, 
civilized,  or  enlightened  state. 

Those  in  the  savage  state  lead  wandering  lives,  and  sub- 
sist mostly  upon  fishing  and  hunting.  In  this  state,  society 
is  found  in  its  rudest  elements.  Education  is  neglected, 
morals  are  corrupt,  and  the  salutary  influences  of  social 
life  are  but  little  felt.  Government,  if  it  exists  at  all,  is 
found  in  its  loosest  forms ; and  the  religion  is  that  of  hea- 
thenism. 

The  half-civilized  state  is  an  advance  from  the  savage 
toward  the  civilized  state.  Those  who  are  found  in  this 
state  attend  somewhat  to  the  cultivation  of  the  land,  to 
learning  and  the  arts.  Still,  they  are  generally  in  a de- 


130 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


graded  state,  without  liberal  forms  of  government  or  salu- 
tary systems  of  religion. 

Most  of  the  Mongolian  race  may  be  said  to  be  in  this 
state ; also,  the  inhabitants  of  North  Africa,  Arabia, 
Hindoostan,  and  a large  part  of  the  Turkish  and  Russian 
empires. 

The  civilized  state  is  where  government,  education,  and 
morals,  are  in  an  improved  condition.  In  civilized  society, 
the  physical  resources  of  the  country  are  developed  ; civil 
and  social  order  prevails,  and  intellectual  and  moral  culture 
are  attended  to.  This  state  of  Society  exists  sometimes 
where  the  inhabitants  are  in  a state  of  heathenism.  This 
was  the  condition  of  the  ancient  Egyptians,  Greeks,  and 
Romans.  At  present,  France  in  general,  Denmark,  parts 
of  Russia,  Mexico,  and  Chili,  are  in  this  state. 

The  enlightened  state  includes  all  that  has  been  said  in 
respect  to  the  civilized  state  of  society,  and  also  the  general 
prevalence  of  the  Christian  religion.  In  this  state,  religion 
controls,  in  a measure,  all  the  other  forms  and  influences  of 
society.  This  state  of  things  is  mostly  future.  Commu- 
nities have,  however,  existed  in  this  state.  There  is  an  ap- 
proximation toward  it  now  in  parts  of  North  America  and 
Europe,  and  even  in  the  islands  of  the  sea,  where,  but  a few 
years  ago,  the  savage  state  prevailed. 

It  may  be  observed  here  that  the  Caucasian  or  white 
race  stands  decidedly  at  the  head  of  the  different  races. 

They  are  superior  in  the  arts  of  civilization,  in  physical 
enterprise,  and  in  personal  beauty  and  symmetry,  and  also 
in  intellectual  and  moral  improvement. 


LANGUAGES. 

The  various  races  of  men  speak  nearly  2,000  different 
languages  and  dialects. 

Attempts  have  been  made  to  classify  these  numerous  lan- 
guages ; those  being  made  to  form  distinct  classes  whose 
roots,  structure,  and  laws,  have  a resemblance  to  each  other. 

The  prevailing  languages  now  in  use  are  the  Chinese, 


HISTORY. 


131 


Arabic,  Persian,  Turkish,  French,  German,  English,  Span* 
ish,  Portuguese,  Russian,  Malay,  Latin,  and  Greek. 

QUESTIONS.  In  what  condition  are  the  different  races  found  ? 
Describe  briefly  the  savage  state.  The  half-civilized  state.  What 
nations  are  found  in  this  state  ? Describe  the  civilized  state.  What 
ancient-  and  modern  nations  in  this  condition  ? Describe  the  enlight- 
ened state.  Where  have  advances  been  made  toward  this  condition  ? 
What  is  said  of  the  Caucasian  race  ? 

How  many  languages  do  the  above  races  speak  ? What  principle 
of  classification  has  been  adopted?  Mention  the  prevailing  lan- 
guages. 

Review  Lesson  L 


A BRIEF  HISTORICAL  VIEW 

OF 

THE  DIFFERENT  COUNTRIES  AND  STATES  ON  THE  GLOBE, 


NORTH  AMERICA. 

UNITED  STATES. 

LESSON  III. 

The  United  States  were  probably  once  inhabited  by  a 
partly-civilized  race  of  men.  This  appears  from  the  va* 
rious  relics  of  civilization  and  art  that  are  found  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  country.  This  race  of  men  is  now 
probably  extinct,  or  lost  in  other  races.  When  this  conti- 
nent was  discovered  by  Columbus,  in  1492,  it  was  inhabit- 
ed by  the  American  race,  generally  in  a savage  state.  It  was 
soon  visited  and  possessed  by  other  European  adventurers, 
before  whom  the  natives  fled,  or  were  destroyed,  till  at 
length  the  country  on  the  Atlantic  side  became  British 


132 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


colonies.  This  state  of  things  remained,  under  various 
modifications,  until  the  year  1776,  when  the  colonies,  hav- 
ing suffered  much  from  British  oppression,  declared  them- 
selves free  and  independent  states.  After  a bloody  war 
of  about  seven  years,  the  independence  of  the  states  was 
acknowledged  by  Great  Britain.  After  various  attempts 
and  difficulties,  the  confederated  form  of  government, 
under  which  we  now  live,  was  established.  Since  that 
time,  we  have  encountered  another  successful  struggle  with 
Great  Britain,  growing  out  of  a denial  of  the  “ right  of 
search,”  on  our  part,  and  depredations  committed  upon  our 
commerce.  We  have  also  carried  on  several  wars  with  the 
Indi  ans.  Our  country,  from  the  beginning,  has  had  a rapid 
growth  and  unrivalled  prosperity. 


MAINE. 

The  first  permanent  settlement  was  made  at  Saco— -some 
say  York  — in  1623.  This  colony  was  placed  under  the  ju- 
risdiction of  Massachusetts  about  1650.  In  1.820,  it  became 
an  independent  state. 

NEW  HAMPSHIRE- 

The  first  settlement  of  this  state  was  made  at  Dover,  in 
1623.  For  more  than  a century,  the  jurisdiction  of  this 
province  was  fluctuating.  Several  times  it  was  a province 
of  Massachusetts,  and  as  often  an  independent  colony. 
Since  1741,  it  has  been  a separate  government. 


QUESTIONS.  What  evidence  is  there  that  the  United  States 
were  anciently  inhabited  ? What  took  place  in  1492  ? What  race 
then  inhabited  this  country  ? What  took  place  soon  after  ? What 
did  the  provinces  at  leno-th  become?  What  took  place  in  1776? 
What  followed  ? What  form  of  government  was  finally  established? 
What  was  the  cause  of  the  last  war  with  Great  Britain  ? What 
other  wars  have  been  waged  ? What  else  is  said  of  our  country  ? 

When  and  where  was  Maine  first  settled?  Under  whose  jurisdic- 
tion was  it  placed  ? What  took  place  in  1820  ? 

When  and  where  was  New  Hampshire  first  settled  ? What  else 
is  said  of  it  ? What  took  place  in  1741  ? 

Review  the  two  preceding  lessons. 


HISTORY. 


133 


LESSON  IV. 

VERMONT. 


This  state  was  first  settled  at  Fort  Dummer,  on  the  Con- 
necticut, in  1724.  The  claim  to  the  state  was  contested 
between  New  York  and  New  Hampshire.  This  contest 
was  not  settled  till  after  the  revolutionary  war,  when  the 
colony  became  independent. 


MASSACHUSETTS. 

This  state  was  first  settled  by  the  Puritans,  in  1620,  at 
Plymouth.  Massachusetts  held  a high  rank  among  the 
colonies,  took  the  lead  in  the  revolutionary  struggle,  and 
has  since  held  a prominent  rank  among  the  states. 

RHODE  ISLAND, 

Rhode  Island  was  first  settled  by  Roger  Williams,  at 
Providence,  in  1636.  He  was  banished  from  Massachusetts 
for  maintaining  principles  of  toleration  odious  to  the  Puritans. 
Rhode  Island  received  its  former  charter  from  Charles  II., 
in  1663.  Violent  attempts  having  been  recently  made  to 
change  the  form  of  government  prescribed  in  that  instru- 
ment, a new  constitution  has  at  length  been  adopted. 


CONNECTICUT. 

This  state  was  first  settled  at  Windsor,  in  1633.  It 
originally  consisted  of  two  colonies,  but  afterward  became 
one.  After  a long  contest,  a charter  was  formed,  under 
which  the  government  was  administered,  until  the  year 
1818.  Since  that  time,  a more  liberal  constitution  has 
been  adopted. 


12 


134 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


NEW  YORK. 

New  York  was  first  settled  at  Albany,  by  the  Dutch,  in 
1612.  After  various  contests,  it  became  an  English  colony. 
It  remained  such  till  the  revolutionary  war.  New  York 
exceeds  either  of  the  other  states  in  population,  wealth, 
commerce,  and  internal  improvements. 


NEW  JERSEY. 

This  state  was  first  settled  by  the  Dutch,  in  1624.  Af- 
ter various  and  protracted  contests  between  the  Swedes  and 
English,  this  state  became  an  English  colony.  In  1776, 
the  present  constitution  was  formed 


QUESTIONS.  When  and  where  was  Vermont  first  settled: 
Between  whom  was  the  claim  to  this  state  contested  ? What  took 
place  during  the  war  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Massachusetts  first  settled  ' 
What  else  is  said  of  Massachusetts  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Rhode  Island  first  settled  ? Whj 
was  he  banished  from  Massachusetts  ? What  took  place  in  1663 
What  has  recently  taken  place  there? 

Where  was  Connecticut  first  settled  ? What  was  its  former  state  ? 
What  then  took  place  ? What  more  recently? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  New  York  first  settled  ? What 
did  it  afterward  become  ? What  else  is  said  of  New  York  ? 

When  and  by  whom  was  New  Jersey  first  settled  ? What  after- 
ward took  place  ? When  was  the  present  constitution  formed  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  V. 

PENNSYLVANIA. 

This  state  was  settled  by  William  Penn,  a Friend,  at 
Philadelphia,  in  1681.  He  immediately  entered  into  a 


HISTORY. 


135 


treaty  with  the  Indians,  and  honorably  purchased  of  them 
large  tracts  of  land.  For  seventy  years  after,  a state  of  un- 
interrupted harmony  existed  between  this  colony  and  the 
Indians.  The  present  constitution  was  formed  in  1790. 
Philadelphia  was  the  capital  of  the  United  States  for  some 
time.  The  colonial,  and  afterward  the  United  States 
congress,  held  its  sessions  here  till  the  year  1800. 


DELAWARE. 


This  state  was  first  settled  at  Fort  Christiana,  in  1637,  by 
the  Swedes  and  Finns.  It  afterward  became  subject  to  New 
York  ; and  in  1682,  it  was  united  with  Pennsylvania.  In 
1701,  it  became  a separate  government.  The  present  con- 
stitution was  formed  in  1831. 


MARYLAND. 


This  state  was  first  settled  by  the  Catholics,  under  Leon- 
ard Calvert,  in  1633.  This  sect,  being  persecuted  in  Eng- 
land, like  the  Puritans,  fled  for  an  asylum  to  this  then  wil- 
derness country.  Baltimore,  like  Penn,  purchased  his  land 
of  the  Indians,  and  lived  in  peace  with  them.  The  Catho- 
lics, though  tolerant  to  all  other  sects,  soon  became  the 
victims  of  persecution.  Their  rights  were  restored  by 
Charles  II.  Soon  after  this,  the  government  was  assumed 
by  the  crown  of  England;  but  in  1716,  the  rights  were  re- 
stored to  the  colony.  At  the  revolution,  it  became  inde- 
pendent, and  the  present  constitution  was  formed. 


DISTRICT  OF  COLUMBIA. 


This  District  is  now  the  seat  of  government  for  the 
United  States,  and  is  under  its  jurisdiction.  It  is  ten  miles 
square,  and  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Potomac.  It  was 
ceded  to  the  government  by  Maryland  and  Virginia  in 
1790,  and  became  the  capital  in  1800. 


136 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


VIRGINIA. 

This  state  was  first  permanently  settled  by  the  English, 
at  Jamestown,  1607.  This  colony  suffered  much  from 
famine  and  war  with  the  Indians.  In  1776,  it  became  an 
independent  state,  and  its  present  constitution,  since  re- 
vised, was  then  formed.  This  state  has  furnished  some  of 
the  most  prominent  men  of  our  country,  and  has  filled  the 
presidential  chair  nearly  two  thirds  of  the  time  since  the 
government  was  formed. 


QUESTIONS.  When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Pennsylvania 
settled?  What  course  did  he  take  with  the  Indians?  What  was 
the  result  of  this  course?  What  took  place  in  1790?  What  is  said 
of  Philadelphia  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Delaware  settled  ? What  after- 
ward took  place?  What  took  place  in  1682?  What  in  1701? 
What  in  1831  ? 

When  and  by  whom  was  Maryland  first  settled  ? What  is  said 
of  the  Catholics  here?  What  course  did  Baltimore  take?  What 
soon  befell  the  Catholics  ? What  soon  followed  ? What  then  took 
place  ? When  were  their  rights  restored  ? 

Of  what  is  the  District  of  Columbia  the  seat  of  government?  By 
what  states  was  it  ceded  to  the  U.  S.  ? When  did  it  become  the  capital  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Virginia  settled  ? What  is  said 
of  this  colony  ? What  is  said  of  this  state  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


I,  ESSON  VI. 


NORTH  CAROLINA. 

After  several  unsuccessful  attempts  by  the  English,  this 
state  was  first  permanently  settled  about  the  year  1650.  It 
afterward  became  a British  colony.  A constitution  was 
formed  in  1776,  and  revised  in  1835. 


HISTORY. 


137 


SOUTH  CAROLINA. 

This  state  was  first  settled  at  Fort  Royal,  in  1670.  It 
was  formerly  united  with  North  Carolina.  In  1790,  the 
present  constitution  was  formed,  and  has  been  twice 
amended  since. 


GEORGIA 

Georgia  was  settled  by  the  English,  at  Savannah,  in 
1732.  The  colony  suffered  much  from  war  with  the  Span- 
iards of  Florida.  The  present  constitution  was  formed 
in  1798. 


ALABAMA. 

This  state,  ceded  to  the  United  States  by  Spain  and 
Georgia,  became  a territory  in  1817,  and  in  1819  an  inde- 
pendent state.  Its  growth  has  since  been  rapid. 


MISSISSIPPI. 

This  state  was  first  settled  by  the  French,  at  Natchez, 
in  1716.  Its  possession  was  long  disputed  by  the  French, 
Spanish,  and  English.  In  1763,  it  was  ceded  to  England. 
In  1798,  it  became  a territory,  and  in  1817  an  independ- 
ent state. 

QUESTIONS.  When  and  by  whom  was  North  Carolina  first 
settled  ? What  did  it  afterward  become  ? What  took  place 
in  1776? 

When  and  by  whom  was  South  Carolina  first  settled?  With  what 
state  was  it  united  ? What  took  place  in  1790  ? 

When  and  by  whom  was  Georgia  first  settled?  What  is  said  of 
this  colony  ? What  took  place  in  1798? 

By  what  states  was  Alabama  ceded  to  this  government  ? What 
took  place  in  1817  ? What  in  1819  ? What  else  is  said  of  it  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Mississippi  first  settled  ? What 
else  is  said  of  it  ? What  took  place  in  1763  ? What  in  1798  ? What 
in  1817? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 

12* 


138 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


LESSON  VII. 


LOUISIANA. 

The  first  permanent  settlement  was  made  at  Biloxi  Bay, 
in  the  year  1698.  It  was  afterward  ceded  to  Spain,  then 
to  France  again.  In  1803,  it  was  purchased,  by  the  United 
Stated,  of  France.  In  1812,  it  was  erected  into  an  inde- 
pendent state,  and  admitted  into  the  Union. 


ARKANSAS. 

This  state  once  formed  a part  of  Louisiana.  It  was 
afterward  included  in  the  territory  of  Missouri.  It  be- 
came a separate  territory  in  1819,  and  an  independent 
state  in  1836. 


TENNESSEE. 

This  state  was  settled  by  emigrants  from  North  Carolina 
and  Virginia,  about  the  year  1765.  It  was  included  in 
North  Carolina  till  1790,  when  it  became  a separate  terri- 
tory. In  1796,  it  was  admitted  into  the  Union  as  an  inde- 
pendent state. 

KENTUCKY. 

This  state  was  once  a part  of  Virginia.  It  was  first 
settled  in  1769.  It  was  admitted  into  the  Union  in  1792. 
The  present  constitution  was  formed  in  1799. 


OHIO. 

This  state  was  settled  by  the  Ohio  Company,  at  Mariet- 
ta, in  1786.  The  country  was  much  annoyed,  at  first,  by  the 
Indians.  They  were  at  length  subdued  by  General  Wayne. 
It  was  admitted  into  the  Union,  as  an  independent  state,  in 
1802.  Its  growth  since  has  been  rapid. 


HISTORY. 


139 


MICHIGAN. 

This  state  was  first  settled  by  the  French,  about  the  year 
1650,  at  Detroit.  Soon  after,  it  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
British.  In  1805,  it  became  a territory,  and  in  1836,  an 
independent  state. 

QUESTIONS.  When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Louisiana  first 
settled?  What  changes  afterward  took  place  ? What  took  place  in 
1803?  What  in  1812? 

What  is  said  of  Arkansas?  What  took  place  in  1819?  What 
in  1836  ? 

When  and  by  whom  was  Tennessee  first  settled  ? What  is  said 
of  its  state  afterward  ? What  took  place  in  1796  ? 

What  is  said  of  Kentucky  ? What  took  place  in  1792? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Ohio  first  settled  ? By  whom 
were  the  Indians  subdued?  What  took  place  in  1802?  What  else 
is  said  of  it  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Michigan  first  settled  ? What 
soon  took  place  ? In  1805?  In  1836? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  VIII. 

INDIANA. 

This  state  was  settled  by  the  French,  in  the  early  part 
of  the  last  century.  About  fifty  years  after,  it  was  ceded 
to  the  British.  In  1800,  it  became  a territory.  It  after- 
ward suffered  greatly  from  Indian  depredations.  The 
Indians  were  finally  expelled  by  General  Harrison,  in  1811. 
It  became  a separate  state  in  1816. 

ILLINOIS. 

The  first  settlement  was  made  at  Kaskaskia,  by  the 
French,  near  the  end  of  the  seventeenth  century.  In  1763, 


140 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


this  province  was  ceded  to  Great  Britain.  In  1809,  it  be- 
came a territory,  and  in  1818,  an  independent  state. 


MISSOURI. 

This  state,  once  a part  of  Louisiana,  was  first  settled  in 
1764,  by  the  French.  In  1804,  it  became  a distinct  terri- 
tory, and  in  1820,  an  independent  state. 

THE  TERRITORIES. 

Florida  was  first  settled  by  the  Spaniards.  The  Indian 
Territory  is  occupied  mostly  by  tribes  of  Indians,  removed 
from  the  states  by  the  general  government.  Iowa  and 
Wisconsin  are  settled  mostly  by  native  Indians.  The 
white  population,  however,  is  rapidly  increasing.  The 
Missouri  and  Oregon  Territories  are  inhabited  by  native 
Indians. 


BRITISH  AMERICA. 

This  part  of  the  American  continent  was  very  early  dis- 
covered by  the  Europeans.  Labrador  was  discovered  by 
Cabot,  in  1497.  Afterward  new  adventurers  discovered 
other  portions.  At  length  the  Canadas  were  ceded  by 
France  to  England,  and  afterward  all  the  other  French 
possessions.  In  the  late  war  with  Great  Britain,  the  United 
States  made  several  unsuccessful  invasions  upon  Canada. 
In  1837,  repeated  insurrections  took  place  in  these  prov- 
inces, but  were  soon  checked. 

QUESTIONS.  When  and  by  whom  was  Indiana  first  settled  ? 
What  took  place  afterward?  What  in  1800?  What  is  also  said  of 
it?  By  whom  were  they  expelled  ? What  occurred  in  1816  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Illinois  first  settled  ? What  took 
place  in  1763  ? In  1809  ? What  in  1818  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Missouri  first  settled  ? What 
took  place  in  1804  ? In  1820  ? 


HISTORY. 


141 


By  whom  was  Florida  first  settled  ? 

By  whom  are  the  Indian  Territories  occupied  ? 

By  whom  are  Iowa  and  Wisconsin  mostly  settled  ? 

By  whom  are  the  Missouri  and  Oregon  Territories  mostly  in- 
habited ? 

When  and  by  whom  was  British  America  first  discovered  ? What 
took  place  in  1497?  What  afterward  ? What  in  the  seventeenth 
century?  What  during  the  last  war  with  England ? In  1837? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  IX 


ICELAND. 

Iceland  was  settled  by  emigrants  from  Norway,  in  the 
ninth  century,  and  for  a long  time  remained  an  independ- 
ent nation.  About  four  hundred  years  after,  it  became 
subject  to  Norway.  It  is  now  a province  of  Denmark. 


TEXAS. 


Texas  was  first  settled  by  the  Spaniards,  at  Bejar,  in 
1681.  About  forty  years  after,  a colony  from  the  Canary 
Islands  was  established  here.  It  was  a scene  of  revolutions 
and  changes  for  more  than  one  hundred  years.  About 
twenty  years  since,  after  the  province  had  been  enlarged  by 
the  government  of  Mexico,  and  the  population  had  been 
increased  by  immigrations  from  the  United  States,  an  at- 
tempt was  made,  by  leading  individuals  in  congress,  to  ac- 
quire this  province ; to  which  many  of  the  Texans 
warmly  responded.  But  it  ultimately  failed.  Subsequent- 
ly, an  insurrection  took  place,  and  the  Mexican  yoke  was 
thrown  off,  and  an  independent  government  was  formed 
among  themselves.  They  have  since  ( 1845)  been  admitted 
into  the  United  States. 


142 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


MEXICO. 

Mexico  abounds  in  the  precious  metals.  Attracted  by 
its  riches,  the  Spaniards  made  invasions  upon  the  natives, 
and  subdued  them,  under  Cortes,  in  1521.  The  natives 
were  then  somewhat  advanced  in  civilization.  The  coun- 
try remained  a Spanish  province  until  1810.  After  that,  a 
revolution  took  place,  and  in  1822  Iturbide  declared  him- 
self emperor.  Another  revolution  soon  took  place,  which 
resulted  in  establishing  a republican  form  of  government. 
Every  thing  has  since  been  in  a confused  and  fluctuating 
state. 


GUATIMALA. 

This  country  also  fell  a prey  to  the  Spaniards  during  the 
invasion  by  Cortes.  It  became  a province  of  Spain,  and 
remained  so  until  1821.  A republican  form  of  government 
has  since  been  established.  The  present  constitution  was 
adopted  in  1824. 

WEST  INDIES. 

There  are  about  forty  islands  between  North  and  South 
America,  that  take  the  name  of  the  West  Indies.  About 
two  thirds  of  them  are  under  the  government  of  Great 
Britain.  Nearly  half  of  the  rest  belong  to  France.  The 
Dutch  have  about  half  as  many  as  the  French.  Denmark 
has  three.  Spain  lias  two,  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico:  these 
are  the  largest  colonial  islands.  Sweden  has  one.  Hayti 
is  an  independent  republic.  Slavery  exists  in  all  these 
islands,  except  in  the  English  and  in  Hayti. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  Iceland  ? To  what  power  did  it 
become  subject  ? To  what  is  it  now  ? 

When,  where,  and  by  whom,  was  Texas  first  settled  ? What  took 
place  forty  years  after?  During  the  next  hundred  years?  What 
twenty  years  since?  Did  the  project  succeed?  What  followed? 
What  have  they  attempted  since  ? 

With  what  does  Mexico  abound  ? What  occurred  in  1521  ? What 
is  said  of  the  natives?  How  long  did  they  remain  a Spanish  prov- 


HISTORY. 


143 


ince  ? What  took  place  afterward  ? What  more  subsequently  ? 
What  has  been  their  state  since  ? 

What  is  said  of  Guatimala  ? 

Of  what  is  the  West  Indies  composed  ? What  proportion  of  them 
belong  to  the  British  ? To  the  French  ? The  Dutch  ? How 
many  belong  to  Denmark  ? How  many  to  Spain  ? To  Sweden  ? 
What  is  Hayti  ? What  is  said  of  slavery  here  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  X. 

SOUTH  AMERICA. 

NEW  GRENADA. 

This  country  formerly  belonged  to  Spain;  but,  after  a 
long  and  bloody  war,  it  became  an  independent  govern- 
ment. In  1819,  New  Grenada  formed  a union  with  Vene- 
zuela, and  since  with  Quito,  under  the  title  of  the  republic 
of  Colombia.  This  union  has  since  been  dissolved,  and 
New  Grenada  is  now  a distinct  republic. 


VENEZUELA. 


This  country,  also,  was  formerly  a Spanish  province. 
Most  of  the  inhabitants  are  native  Americans.  They  are 
exceedingly  ferocious.  The  present  constitution  of  their 
government  is  similar  to  that  of  New  Grenada. 


EQUADOR. 


This  republic  was  once  a Spanish  colony.  After  a 
desperate  struggle,  and  a most  decisive  victory  over  the 


144 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


Spanish  armies,  the  inhabitants  gained  their  freedom,  am 
united  with  the  confederacy  of  Colombia.  This  union  was 
dissolved  in  1830. 


GUIANA. 


This  country  belongs  to  the  English,  Dutch,  and  French. 
It  is  inhabited  mostly  by  Indians  and  Negroes.  It  was 
formerly  a part  of  Venezuela  and  Brazil. 


PERU. 

This  country  was  subdued,  in  the  sixteenth  century,  by 
the  Spaniards,  under  Pizarro.  After  a sharp  contest,  the 
Spanish  yoke  has  finally  been  thrown  off.  The  present 
republic  was  formed  in  the  year  1821. 


BOLIVIA. 


This  country  was  formerly  a Spanish  province.  In 
1824,  the  Spanish  yoke  was  thrown  off,  and  soon  after- 
ward a republican  form  of  government  was  established. 


QUESTIONS.  To  what  country  did  New  Grenada  belong? 
What  afterward  took  place?  What  in  1819?  What  has  since 
taken  place  ? 

What  was  Venezuela  formerly  ? What  is  said  of  the  inhabitants? 
What  was  Equador  formerly  ? What  afterward  took  place  ? 
What  in  1830  ? 

To  what  powers  does  Guiana  belong?  By  whom  is  it  inhabited? 
What  happened  to  Peru  in  the  sixteenth  century  ? What  took 
place  in  1821  ? 

What  was  Bolivia  formerly  ? What  took  place  in  1824  ? What 
followed  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


HISTORY. 


14  5 


LESSON  XI. 

BRAZIL. 

Brazil  was  once  a Portuguese  colony.  It  afterward 
became  a joint  kingdom  with  Portugal.  In  1825,  it  was 
erected  into  a separate  empire,  to  be  governed  by  a line 
of  sovereigns  from  the  ancient  kingdom.  This  form  of 
government  has  been  variously  modified  since.  The  ten- 
dencies now  are  towards  republicanism. 


PARAGUAY. 


After  various  fluctuations,  this  country  declared  itself 
independent,  in  1813.  Soon  after  this,  the  government 
fell  into  the  hands  of  Francia,  who  claimed  the  title  of  dic- 
tator, and  exercised  arbitrary  power. 

UNITED  PROVINCES. 

This  country  was  formerly  a Spanish  province.  About 
the  year  1808,  a revolt  took  place,  and  the  Spanish  power 
was  crushed.  Several  severe  struggles  have  since  been 
encountered,  in  which  the  Spaniards  were  defeated.  The 
political  condition  of  this  country  has  since  been  fluctu- 
ating. It  has  had  several  severe  contests  with  other  powers. 
Its  present  form  of  government  is  republican. 


CHILI. 

Chili  was  once  a colony  of  Spain.  In  1810,  a revolu- 
tion took  place.  Several  years  after,  a declaration  of  in- 
dependence was  made.  In  1827,  a republican  form  of 
government  was  established. 

1 3 


146 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


PATAGONIA. 

But  little  is  known  of  this  country.  The  inhabitants 
have  hitherto  resisted  all  attempts  made  to  civilize  them,  or 
introduce  among  them  the  Christian  religion. 


QUESTIONS.  What  was  Brazil  formerly  ? What  afterward 
took  place?  What  followed  in  1825?  What  else  is  said  of  this 
country  ? 

What  is  said  of  Paraguay  ? Of  Doctor  Frarxcia  ? 

What  were  the  United  Provinces  formerly  ? What  took  place  in 
1808  ? What  is  said  of  their  condition  ? 

What  was  Chili  formerly  ? What  took  place  in  1810?  In  1827  ? 
What  is  said  of  Patagonia?  Of  its  inhabitants? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XII. 


EUROPE. 

ENGLAND. 

The  history  of  England  is  interwoven  with  the  history 
of  modern  nations  and  times.  Some  have  supposed  that 
England  was  inhabited  nearly  3,000  years  ago.  The  abo- 
riginal inhabitants  were  Celts.  Subsequently  the  Goths, 
from  the  continent,  made  an  invasion  upon  the  island,  and 
drove  the  native  Celts  from  their  possessions  to  the  then 
uninhabited  parts.  A little  while  previous  to  the  Christian 
era,  Julius  Caesar,  a Roman  general,  invaded  Britain,  and 
subjected  it  to  the  Roman  empire.  The  Romans  held 
possession  of  the  island  till  about  the  year  400.  It  was 
then  conquered  by  the  Saxons,  bnd  districted  out  into  ter- 
ritories. These  districts  were  afterward  consolidated  into 
one  kingdom,  by  Egbert,  king  of  West  Saxony.  This 


HISTORY. 


147 


state  of  things  remained,  under  various  modifications,  till 
about  the  middle  of  the  eleventh  century,  when  the  whole 
country  was  subdued  by  William,  duke  of  Normandy.  The 
present  line  of  British  sovereigns  take  their  descent  from 
this  new  establishment  of  power,  styled,  in  British  history, 
the  Conquest.  A revolution  took  place  about  the  middle 
of  the  seventeenth  century,  in  the  course  of  which  parlia- 
ment condemned  and  executed  Charles  I.  Out  of  this  state 
of  things  a republican  form  of  government  was  attempted 
by  Cromwell.  At  his  death,  the  government  was  changed 
back  into  its  former  state,  and  the  succession  of  kings  was 
renewed. 

Soon  afterward,  owing  to  the  intolerance  and  tyranny 
of  James  II.,  a bigoted  Prince,  parliament  again  assumed 
the  sovereign  power,  and  placed  William  of  Orange 
upon  the  throne.  From  this  era  may  be  dated  the 
commencement  of  that  dtgree  of  liberty  and  religious  tol- 
eration that  now  exists  in  England.  After  the  reformation, 
the  English  government  vibrated  between  Popery  and  Prot- 
estantism. Each  party,  when  in  power,  was  often  exceed- 
ingly intolerant  and  oppressive.  Ultimately,  a compromise 
was  made  between  the  two  great  parties,  and  a mixture 
of  the  Protestant  and  Catholic  forms  and  faith  became, 
and  now  continues  to  be,  the  established  religion  of 
England. 

The  English  have  extended  their  conquests  into  all 
quarters  of  the  globe.  They  have  large  possessions  in 
Africa,  Asia,  New  Holland,  America,  and  the  islands  of 
the  sea.  England  may  now  be  regarded  as  the  most  power- 
ful nation  in  the  world.  Her  agricultural,  naval,  and  com- 
mercial interests  are  unrivalled  by  those  of  any  other 
country. 

Her  debt  is  $3,800,000,009.  Her  annual  income,  or 
revenue,  is  about  $250,000,000.  Her  exports  are  annually 
about  $270,000,000 ; imports,  $250,000,000.  Her  ex- 
ports are  mostly  derived  from  her  colonial  territories. 

QUESTIONS.  By  whom  was  England  early  inhabited?  What 
followed  ? What  took  place  just  before  the  Christian  era  ? What  is 
said  of  the  Saxons  ? What  is  recorded  of  Egbert  ? What  took  place 
in  the  eleventh  century  ? What  followed  from  this  state  of  things? 
What  took  place  in  the  seventeenth  century?  What  was  the  result? 


148 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


After  Cromwell,  what  took  place?  What  in  the  time  of  James  II.? 
What  may  be  dated  from  this  era  ? What  followed  for  several  cen- 
turies ? What  was  the  final  result  ? What  else  is  said  of  England  ? 
Where  have  they  possessions?  In  what  do  they  excel?  What  are 
the  debt,  income,  and  revenue,  of  Great  Britain?  What  are  the 
exports  and  imports  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XIII. 

SCOTLAND. 


The  history  of  Scotland  is  blended  with  that  of  England. 
This  country  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  British  about  the 
fourteenth  century.  Little  is  known  of  this  country  before 
that  time.  The  British  power  was  repelled  by  Wallace  and 
Bruce,  early  in  the  fifteenth  century  ; and  the  independence 
of  Scotland  was  reestablished.  For  a long  time  after- 
ward, Scotland  was  a scene  of  revolutions  and  tumults. 
The  Stuarts,  who  were  the  reigning  family,  were  unfortu- 
nate; and  finally,  the  celebrated  Mary,  queen  of  the  Scots, 
having  been  put  to  death  by  Elizabeth,  queen  of  England, 
James,  the  son  of  Mary,  was  placed  upon  the  throne  of 
England,  and  the  government  of  Scotland  has,  from  that 
time,  been  under  the  sovereignty  of  England. 


IRELAND. 

The  original  inhabitants  of  this  island  were  Celts.  Their 
history  is  dated  as  far  back  as  two  hundred  years  before 
Christ.  Their  line  of  kings  is  reckoned  from  Kimboath. 
The  Irish  were  early  converted  to  Christianity  by  the  see 
of  Rome.  From  the  ninth  to  the.  eleventh  century,  the 
island  was  overrun  by  the  Danes.  They  were  finally  ex- 
pelled. But  the  island  soon  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  British. 
The  British  yoke,  however,  sat  hard  upon  the  necks  of  the 


HISTORY. 


149 


free,  proud  sons  of  the  Celtic  race.  They  disdained  their 
bondage,  and  frequent  rebellions  arose,  by  which  Ireland 
was  often  made  a field  of  blood.  In  order  to  keep  the  pa- 
triotic spirit  of  the  Irish  under,  the  most  oppressive  meas- 
ures were,  from  time  to  time,  adopted  by  the  English  gov- 
ernment. Their  goods  were  confiscated,  the  people  sold  into 
slavery,  and  the  tithing  system  rigidly  enforced.  Ireland 
is  a beautiful  but  disheartened  country.  With  Scotland, 
it  still  remains  a part  of  the  British  empire. 


SPAIN. 

The  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  Spain  were  Celts.  It  af- 
terward became  a Roman  province.  It  was  subjected  to 
the  Romans,  together  with  Carthage,  in  the  second  Punic 
war.  But,  when  Rome  fell,  Spain  fell  also,  and  shared 
her  fate.  In  421,  the  empire  of  the  Visigoths  was  founded. 
About  three  hundred  years  after,  the  Saracens,  from  Africa, 
took  possession  of  the  country.  The  African  power  was, 
by  a long  succession  of  wars,  broken,  and  distinct  king- 
doms were  founded  from  the  territory  torn  from  the  inva- 
ders. Ultimately,  the  different  kingdoms  were  united  into 
one  government.  Then  were  the  days  of  Spanish  glory. 
They  had  entirely  expelled  foreign  invaders,  and  a new 
world,  in  the  west,  had  been  discovered,  under  their  aus- 
pices, by  Christopher  Columbus. 

After  this  period,  Spain  began  to  decline.  In  1808, 
she  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  French,  under  Napoleon 
Buonaparte.  Taking  advantage  of  this,  her  foreign  prov- 
inces revolted.  Her  subjugation  to  France,  however,  was 
but  temporary. 

Spain  has  long  been  the  theatre  of  civil  and  religious 
tyranny.  The  cruelties  of  the  inquisition  and  the  rack 
were  long  endured  here.  But,  more  recently,  advances 
have  been  made  towards  general  freedom.  And  though,  at 
present,  this  kingdom  is  the  scene  of  civil  war,  growing  out 
of  rival  claims  to  the  crown,  yet  it  is  hoped  that  this  once 
wealthiest  and  most  enterprising  empire  on  the  globe,  will 
rise  to  that  rank  among  the  nations,  and  to  the  posses- 
sion of  those  civil  rights,  to  which  she  has  long  been 
aspiring. 


13* 


150 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


QUESTIONS.  What  took  place,  in  respect  to  Scotland,  in  the 
fourteenth  century  ? In  the  fifteenth  ? And  what  subsequently  ? 
What  was  the  result  ? 

What  is  said  of  the  ancient  Irish?  From  whom  were  their  kings 
reckoned?  What  else  is  said  of  this  island?  What  took  place  be- 
tween the  ninth  and  eleventh  centuries?  What  afterward?  Did 
they  submit  to  this  ? What  course  did  England  take?  What  more 
is  said  of  them  ? 

Who  were  the  ancient  Spaniards  ? What  afterward  took  place  ? 
What  in  421  ? What  300  years  afterward  ? What  finally  followed  ? 
What  has  taken  place  since  the  days  of  Spanish  glory  ? What  oc- 
curred in  1808 ? Of  what  has  Spain  long  been  the  theatre? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XIV. 


PORTUGAL. 

The  history  of  this  country,  up  to  the  thirteenth  century, 
is  nearly  identical  with  that  of  Spain.  It  was  however 
early  erected  into  a separate  and  independent  kingdom. 
In  the  latter  part  of  the  sixteenth  century,  Philip,  king  of 
Spain,  conquered  this  kingdom,  and  annexed  it  to  his  domin- 
ions. In  1640,  the  independence  of  Portugal  was  restored. 
In  1807,  it  was  conquered  by  the  French  unoer  Buonaparte, 
but  it  was  soon  restored  to  its  former  condition.  It  has 
since  been  the  scene  of  bloody  wars  and  revolutions. 


FRANCE. 

France  was  early  subdued  by  the  Roman  power.  The 
native  Gauls  were  afterwards  conquered  by  the  Germans. 
The  old  race  of  kings  became  extinct  in  the  year  754, 
and  a new  line  was  established.  This  dynasty  continued 
about  a century,  when  the  Bourbon  family  assumed  the 
throne.  France,  for  a season,  became  subject  to  Eng- 
land, under  Henry  V.  This  subjection,  at  best  but  little 


HISTORY'. 


151 


inore  than  nominal,  soon  ceased,  and  France  forthwith  ex- 
tended her  conquests  far  and  wide,  and  rose  to  great  politi- 
cal eminence  in  Europe. 

During  the  latter  part  of  the  last  century,  the  prosperity 
and  power  of  the  French  having  declined,  a bloody  rev- 
olution broke  out.  A spirit  of  recklessness  and  anarchy, 
under  the  name  of  free,  principles,  prevailed.  The  reign- 
ing monarch  was  dethroned.  Every  thing  was  in  a state 
of  distraction.  Out  of  this  state  of  things,  a directory 
was  formed.  At  this  period,  Napoleon  Buonaparte  ap- 
peared upon  the  political  stage.  He  established  a sort  of 
republic,  and  afterwards  an  empire.  He  extended  his 
power  and  conquests  over  most  of  Europe.  After  various 
fortunes  and  reverses,  the  power  and  government  of  Napo- 
leon were  crushed  by  the  allied  powers  of  Europe.  The 
Bourbons  were  then  reinstated  upon  the  throne  of  France. 
But  their  reign  was  brief.  For,  assuming  tyrannical  and 
absolute  power,  another  revolution  took  place  in  1S30. 
The  form  of  government  was  then  entirely  changed,  and 
Louis  Philippe  placed  upon  the  throne  of  France.  The 
present  government  is  liberal.  Identified  closely  with  the 
history  of  the  French,  for  the  last  fifty  years,  is  the  name, 
ever  dear  to  Americans,  of  Lafayette.  He  took  a conspicu- 
ous part  in  both  revolutions,  as  the  champion  of  free  prin- 
ciples, but  as  the  unbending  foe  of  the  licentious,  violent, 
lawless  spirit  that  characterized  his  times.  Pie  never  favored 
the  schemes  of  Buonaparte.  The  prospects  of  France  are 
now  brightening. 


QUESTIONS.  With  that  of  what  other  country  is  the  history  of 
Portugal  identified  ? What  occurred  in  the  sixteenth  century  ? In 
1640  ? In  1807  ? 

By  whom  was  France  early  subdued  ? What  afterward  took 
place  ? What  in  750  ? When  did  the  Bourbon  family  take  the 
throne  ? To  what  power  did  France  become  subject  ? What  fol- 
lowed after  this  subjection  ceased?  What  occurred  during  the  last 
century  ? What  grew  out  of  this  state  of  things  ? What  conqueror 
then  arose  ? What  did  he  establish  ? By  whom  was  he  crushed  ? 
What  followed  ? What  took  place  in  1830  ? What  is  said  of  La- 
fayette ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


152 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


LESSON  XV. 

ITALY. 

Italy  was  once  the  seat  of  the  most  powerful  empire  on 
the  globe.  An  extended  history  of  this  country  cannot 
now  be  attempted.  Little  is  known  of  this  peninsula  be- 
fore the  landing  of  the  Asiatic  colonies.  And  the  whole 
history  of  the  Romans  is  so  interwoven  with  mythology 
and  fabulous  tradition,  that  implicit  reliance  cannot  be 
placed  upon  the  early  accounts  of  this  nation.  They  rose 
gradually  to  civilization  and  eminence,  by  their  enterprise 
and  valor  in  arms.  They  finally  subdued  the  Grecian  em- 
pire, and  with  it  the  world.  The  golden  period  of  litera- 
ture and  refinement  in  Rome,  was  not,  however,  till  her 
political  and  military  power  had  begun  to  decline.  Rome, 
at  last,  fell  by  its  own  weight  and  corruption.  It  was  over- 
run by  the  Goths  and  Vandals,  and  other  tribes  from  the 
north  of  Europe.  About  this  time,  the  Christian  religion 
was  introduced  into  the  empire,  and  soon  became  the 
established  religion  of  the  nation.  The  church  and  state 
were  afterward  united,  and  the  government  became  a 
hierarchy,  or  ecclesiastical  dynasty.  This  state  of  things 
remained,  without  much  alteration,  till  the  reformation, 
when  the  power  of  the  pope  was  shaken.  The  advancement 
of  liberal  principles  and  of  science  has  ever  operated  to 
weaken  tyranical  power,  throughout  the  more  enlight- 
ened nations  where  it  has  prevailed.  During  the  latter 
part  of  the  last  century,  Italy  was  conquered  by  Napo- 
leon, and  the  pope  was  made  a prisoner  of  war.  Since 
then,  his  civil  power  has  been  in  a very  fluctuating  state. 
The  country  is,  in  fact,  divided  into  distinct  states,  and  the 
political  dominion  of  the  pope  is  exercised  over  but  a few 
small  provinces. 

GREECE. 

The  history  of  Greece  runs  into  that  of  Rome.  The 
native  tribes,  as  they  rose  to  power  and  eminence,  became 


ttisToxw. 


1**r* 

oo 


united  into  one  empire.  They  afterward  conquered  the 
Trojans  and  Persians.  Under  Alexander  the  Great,  their 
conquests  were  extended  over  nearly  all  the  then  known 
world.  Greece  was  finally  conquered  by  the  Romans.  Af- 
terward the  condition  of  the  Greeks  was  fluctuating.  It 
ultimately  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Ottoman  emperor. 
After  having  suffered  great  oppression  from  the  Turkish 
power,  a revolution  took  place  in  1821,  when  the  peninsula 
of  Greece  was  drenched  in  blood.  At  length,  the  interpo- 
sition of  several  European  powers  ended  the  struggle,  and 
the  independence  of  Greece  was  acknowledged  by  the  sul- 
tan of  Turkey. 


QUESTIONS.  What  was  Italy  formerly?  By  whom  was  it  first 
settled?  What  is  said  of  the  history  of  this  people  ? Of  their  con- 
quests, refinement,  power  ? What  became  of  Rome  ? What  soon 
followed  ? What  form  of  government  was  established  ? What  took 
place  at  the  reformation  ? What  during  the  last  century  ? What 
has  been  the  state  of  the  Popish  power  since  Italy  was  conquered  by 
Napoleon  ? 

With  the  history  of  what  other  country  is  that  of  Greece  connect- 
ed ? What  nations  did  the  early  Greeks  conquer?  What  took  place 
under  Alexander  ? By  whom  were  the  Greeks  conquered  ? Finally, 
into  whose  hands  did  this  empire  fall?  What  took  place  in  1821? 
What  powers  assisted  the  Greeks  ? What  was  the  result  of  this 
struggle  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XVI. 

TURKEY. 

Little  is  known  of  the  origin  of  the  Turks.  They  were 
first  known  as  a Scythian  tribe,  about  the  sixth  century. 
About  800  years  after,  Osman,  a Turkish  chief,  having  ex- 
tended his  conquests  into  Asia,  assumed  the  title  of  sultan. 
Hence  the  origin  of  the  Turkish  or  Ottoman  empire. 
This  empire  soon  became  the  seat  of  Mahometanism. 


i54 


MISCELLANEOUS  AIEvv, 


This  provoked  the  Christian  powers  to  what  are  called' 
crusades,  instigated  by  Peter  the  Hermit,  against  the  Ot- 
toman power,  to  rescue  the  Holy  City  from  the  hands  of 
the  Turks.  This  empire,  during  the  last  century,  was 
greatly  weakened  and  humbled  by  the  Russian  power,  and 
more  recently  by  civil  wars,  and  the  revolt  of  some  of  her 
most  powerful  provinces. 

SWITZERLAND. 

The  Swiss  are  said  to  be  descendants  of  the  ancient 
Helvetii.  They  were  long  subject  to  Austria;  but,  having 
suffered  much  from  long  oppression,  they  rebelled,  and  ulti- 
mately became  a separate  and  confederated  government, 
Switzerland  was  conquered  by  Buonaparte;  but  her  sub- 
jection was  short.  She  is  now  an  independent  government. 
Calvin,  the  great  reformer,  flourished  here. 


AUSTRIA. 

Austria  began  to  attract’ notice  in  the  thirteenth  century. 
Having  made  large  acquisitions  of  territory  and  strength, 
she  assumed  a rank  among  the  European  crowns  in  the 
sixteenth  century.  Austria  became  an  empire  early  in 
the  present  century. 

PRUSSIA 

Prussia  first  assumed  a rank  among  the  kingdoms  of  Eu- 
rope in  the  eighteenth  century.  As  a kingdom,  Prussia  grad- 
ually rose  to  power,  and  extended  her  territories,  till  finally 
they  fell  into  the  hands  of  Napoleon.  Since  then,  this  king- 
dom has  been  established  upon  a firm  and  independent  basis, 
Prussia  outdoes  all  other  nations  in  her  systems  of  education. 


QUESTIONS.  Who  were  the  Turks,  when  they  were  first 
known  ? What  can  you  say  of  Osman  ? Of  what  did  this  empire 
soon  become  the  seat  ? To  what  did  this  lead  ? Who  instigated  the 
crusades  ? What  took  plaGe  during  the  la3t  century  ? 


HISTORY. 


155 


What  is  said  of  the  Swiss  ? To  what  government  were  they  sub- 
ject ? What  at  length  took  place  ? By  whom  was  Switzerland  con- 
quered ? What  is  her  political  condition  now  ? What  great  reformer 
lived  there  ? 

What  is  said  of  Austria  ? When  did  it  become  an  empire  ? 

How  long  has  Prussia  held  a rank  among  the  kingdoms  of  Europe  ? 
Into  whose  hands  did  she  fall?  What  has  been  her  state  since? 
What  else  is  said  of  Prussia  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XVII. 

GERMANY. 

Ancient  Germany  was  made  up  of  independent  prov- 
inces. It  early  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Romans,  and  after- 
ward was  brought  under  the  dominion  of  Charlemagne. 
In  the  tenth  century,  it  became  an  elective  monarchy.  It 
was  crushed  by  the  French  power  in  1806.  In  1814,  it 
was  reestablished  into  a confederated  form  of  government. 

BELGIUM. 

Belgium  was  formerly  connected  with  Holland.  When 
Holland  revolted  from  the  Spanish  power,  Belgium  still  re- 
mained a Spanish  province.  In  the  eighteenth  century,  it 
was  subjected  to  Austria.  In  1795,  it  was  subjected  to 
France.  Afterward  it  was  united  with  Holland.  But  they 
were  oppressed  by  the  Dutch,  and  in  1830  revolted,  and 
became  a separate  government. 


HOLLAND. 

The  early  natives  of  this  country  fell  into  the  hands  of 
the  Romans ; and  in  the  ninth  century,  it  was  united  with 
Germany.  Subsequently,  the  provinces  of  the  Netherlands 


156 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


fell  under  the  Spanish  power.  In  1581,  they  revolted,  and 
waged  a bloody  war  for  freedom.  They  came  off  victori- 
ous, and  formed  a separate  government.  In  1794,  this 
kingdom  was  conquered  by  France.  With  the  fall  of  Na- 
poleon, the  Dutch  kingdom  was  established  on  its  former 
basis.  Since  then,  the  Belgic  provinces  have  revolted. 


DENMARK. 

Denmark,  Norway,  and  Sweden,  were  formerly  called 
Scandinavia.  After  the  Christian  era,  they  were  conquered 
and  governed  by  the  Goths.  In  the  middle  ages,  the  in- 
habitants of  these  countries  were  called  Normans , or 
Northmen.  After  this  time,  they  extended  their  conquests 
over  Europe  and  the  Atlantic  islands  bordering  on  the  con- 
tinent. During  the  eleventh  century,  civilization  and  Chris- 
tianity were  introduced.  In  the  sixteenth  century,  Sweden 
was  broken  off  from  the  empire,  and  in  1814,  Norway  was 
transferred  by  the  allied  powers  to  Sweden. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  ancient  Germany?  Into  whose 
hands  did  it  early  fall  ? Under  whose  dominion  was  it  afterward  ? 
What  took  place  in  the  tenth  century  ? Afterward,  in  1806  ? And 
then  in  1814  ? 

What  is  said  of  Belgium  ? Did  Belgium  revolt  from  Spain  with 
Holland  ? What  took  place  in  the  eighteenth  century  ? What  since, 
in  1795  ? What  afterward  ? What  in  1830  ? 

What  is  said  of  the  early  natives  of  Holland  ? What  took  place  in 
the  ninth  century?  What  in  1581?  What  was  the  result  of  this 
contest  ? What  took  place  in  1795  ? What  at  the  fall  of  Napoleon  ? 
What  since  ? 

What  were  Denmark,  Norway,  and  Sweden,  formerly  called  ? 
What  took  place  after  the  Christian  era  ? What  were  they  called  in 
the  middle  ages?  What  then  took  place?  What  in  the  eleventh 
century  ? What  in  the  sixteenth  ? What  in  1814  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


HISTORY. 


157 


LESSON  XVIII. 

NORWAY. 


The  native  Norwegians  were  Finns.  They  were  at  length 
expelled  by  the  Goths.  This  country  became  subject  to 
Denmark  during  the  middle  ages.  It  was  arbitrarily  wrestl- 
ed from  Denmark,  and  ceded  to  Sweden,  by  the  allied 
powers,  in  1814. 


SWEDEN. 

Sweden  also  was  first  peopled  by  the  Finns,  and  conquered 
by  the  Goths.  In  the  fourteenth  century,  it  was  conquered 
ny  the  Danes.  A few  centuries  afterwards,  the  Danish 
yoke  was  thrown  off,  under  Gustavus  Vasa,  who  was  consti- 
tuted king.  Their  military  career,  for  several  centuries 
after  this,  was  brilliant.  Charles  the  Twelfth,  after  a brief 
career  of  prosperity  and  conquests,  was  finally  crushed  by 
the  Russian  power.  It  is  now  one  of  the  most  enlight- 
ened and  free  of  the  kingdoms  of  Europe. 

POLAND. 

The  natives  of  this  country  were  Sarmatians.  They 
have  suffered  great  reverses  from  the  very  first.  In  the 
ninth  century,  Poland  became  a kingdom.  In  the  latter  part 
of  the  last  century,  it  was  divided  between  Russia,  Austria, 
and  Prussia,  at  three  different  periods.  Napoleon  con- 
quered a portion  of  this  country,  but  the  French  dominion 
ceased  at  his  downfall.  In  1830,  the  Poles  rose  in  rebel- 
lion against  the  Russians.  After  several  successful  battles, 
they  were  finally  conquered ; and  the  Russian  power  over 
them  is  now  complete.  Though  the  Poles  are  a hardy,  war- 
like people,  they  have,  from  the  beginning,  been  subject  to 
heavy  reverses  and  misfortunes.  They  have  suffered  great 
oppression  from  their  conquerors ; which,  while  it  has 
tended  to  dishearten  and  humble  them,  has,  at  the  same 
time,  roused  them  to  rebellion  to  recover  that  frppdmn  and 
14 


158 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


power  for  which  they  always  had  a strong  passion.  They 
are  now  a dejected  and  scattered  people. 


RUSSIA. 

We  know  little  of  Russia  before  the  fifteenth  century, 
when  it  was  subject  to  the  empire  of  Tamerlane.  But 
Peter  the  Great,  early  in  the  eighteenth  century,  laid  the 
foundation  of  the  Russian  power  and  empire.  His  efforts 
and  success  in  civilizing  and  elevating  the  Russian  tribes 
were  unparalleled.  He  gave  existence  and  character  to  this 
empire.  Catharine  conquered  the  Poles  and  Turks.  The 
empire  rapidly  rose  in  power  and  importance.  The  inva- 
sion of  Napoleon,  in  1812,  was  checked,  and  after  his 
downfall,  and  the  overthrow  of  the  French  empire,  in  which 
the  Russian  armies  took  a conspicuous  part,  the  Russian 
conquests  were  widely  extended  over  parts  of  Europe. 
The  Russian  empire  is  one  of  the  largest  and  most  power- 
ful on  the  globe, 


QUESTIONS.  Who  were  the  native  Norwegians?  By  whom 
were  they  expelled  ? What  took  place  in  the  middle  ages  ? What 
in  1814  ? 

By  whom  was  Sweden  first  settled  ? By  whom  conquered  ? What 
took  place  in  the  fourteenth  century  ? What  then  followed  ? What 
is  said  of  their  military  career?  What  of  Charles  XII.  ? 

Who  were  the  native  Poles  ? What  has  been  their  history  ? What 
took  place  in  the  ninth  century  ? What  in  the  last  century  ? What 
in  1830  ? What  was  the  result  of  the  contest  with  Russia  ? What 
is  said  of  the  Poles  ? What  is  their  present  condition  ? 

When  were  the  Russians  first  known  ? Who  was  the  father  of 
this  empire  ? What  is  said  of  his  efforts  to  civilize  his  countrymen  ? 
What  is  said  of  Catharine  ? What  is  said  of  the  French  invasion  ? 
What  has  been  the  state  of  the  Russian  empire  since  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons 


HISTORY. 


159 


LESSON  XIX. 
ASIA. 

TURKEY  IN  ASIA. 


This  is  the  birthplace  of  civilization  and  of  man.  Man 
here  first  existed,  and  walked  with  God,  and  here  fell. 
This  was  the  theatre  of  the  antediluvian  world.  Here  the 
ark  was  made.  Over  these  mountains  and  plains  it  floated, 
and  on  one  of  its  summits  rested.  It  was  here  that  Abra- 
ham and  the  Jewish  nation  flourished,  the  prophets  wrote 
and  sung.  Here  stood  Bethlehem  and  the  Holy  City, 
Here  the  Savior  of  the  world  was  born,  died,  and  ascend- 
ed. And  this  was  the  scene  of  most  of  the  events  recorded 
in  the  Bible. 

The  ancient  empires  of  Assyria  and  Babylon  flourished 
here.  But  long  before  the  Christian  era,  they  were  swal- 
lowed up  in  the  Persian  empire.  Afterward,  the  Persian 
was  lost  in  the  Grecian  empire  ; and  just  before  the  Chris- 
tian era,  this  country,  with  all  the  Grecian  dominions,  fell 
into  the  vortex  of  Roman  conquest.  About  800  years  after, 
the  Saracens  subjected  this  country  to  the  Mahometan  ca- 
liphs ; and  800  years  after  this,  the  Holy  Land  was  sub- 
jected to  the  Ottoman  or  Turkish  empire.  A part  of  it, 
including  the  Holy  City,  is  now  claimed  by  the  pacha  of 

Egypt. 


ARABIA. 


This  is  the  birthplace  of  Mahomet.  He  soon  conquered 
Arabia  and  Syria.  His  empire  and  religion  were  spread 
over  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  Arabia  has  since  been 
nominally  subjected  to  the  Porte,  or  Ottoman  power. 


160 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


PERSIA. 

Persia,  after  its  union  with  Media,  became  a powerful 
empire.  Under  Cyrus,  the  ancient  Assyrian  empire  was 
conquered,  and  annexed  to  the  Persian  empire.  But  during 
the  reign  of  Xerxes,  a weak  and  unfortunate  prince,  this 
empire  was  conquered  by  the  Greeks,  and  became  a part  of 
the  Grecian  empire.  The  largest  army,  probably,  that  was 
ever  led  into  the  field,  consisting  of  several  millions,  was 
checked  and  broken,  though  not  conquered,  by  perhaps  the 
smallest  that  ever  appeared  on  the  field  of  battle  — the  three 
hundred  Lacedemonians. 

Afterward,  Persia  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Saracens  and 
Turks.  In  the  middle  ages,  it  was  overrun  by  the  Mongols, 
and  in  the  fifteenth  century,  by  the  Turcomans.  It  is  now 
an  absolute  monarchy. 


QUESTIONS.  Of  what  is  Turkey  the  birthplace  ? Mention 
some  events  that  took  place  here.  Some  of  the  cities.  Of  what  was 
this  country  the  scene  ? What  ancient  empires  flourished  here  ? 
What  took  place  just  before  the  Christian  era?  What  800  years 
after  ? What  800  years  after  this  ? 

Of  what  was  Arabia  the  birthplace  ? What  is  said  of  him  ? To 
what  power  is  Arabia  now  subjected  ? 

What  is  said  of  Persia?  What  took  place  under  Cyrus?  What 
under  Xerxes  ? What  is  said  of  the  battle  ? What  took  place  after- 
ward ? What  in  the  middle  ages  ? What  in  the  fifteenth  century  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XX. 
INDEPENDENT  TARTARY. 


The  Tartars,  like  the  ancient  Scythians  and  Saracens, 
are  invincible  by  civilization.  They  seem  to  possess  a 
stereotyped  character.  In  the  thirteenth  century,  this 


HISTORY. 


161 


country  was  conquered  by  Genghis  Khan ; but  afterward 
Tamerlane  threw  off  the  Mongol  yoke,  subdued  Persia, 
erected  an  empire,  and,  for  a time,  held  in  check  the  Turk- 
ish power  in  the  west.  It  has  latterly  vibrated  between  the 
Russian  and  Chinese  powers.  The  present  government, 
however,  is  principally  that  of  independent  chiefs. 


AFGHANISTAN. 

This  country  rose  from  ancient  barbarous  tribes.  It  took 
the  form  of  a kingdom  in  the  eleventh  century,  and  soon 
became  the  centre  of  an  extensive  empire.  In  the  four- 
teenth century,  it  was  subjected  to  the  empire  of  Tamer- 
lane. Four  hundred  years  after,  the  Afghans  conquered 
Persia.  Shortly  after  this,  they  were  in  turn  conquered 
and  subdued  by  the  Persians.  Since  then,  the  Persian  yoke 
has  been  thrown  off.  But  the  empire  is  broken  up  into 
provinces,  governed  mostly  by  independent  chiefs. 

BELOOCHISTAN. 

Beloochistan  compares,  in  most  respects,  with  Afghanis- 
tan. This  people  have  never  risen  to  any  political  emi- 
nence in  the  world.  They  are  still  in  a state  of  semi-civil- 
ization, and  are  governed  mostly  by  independent  chiefs. 


HINDOOSTAN. 

This  country  was  invaded  very  early  by  the  Egyptians, 
Persians,  and  Greeks,  successively.  The  Mahometan 
power  was  established  here  in  the  eleventh  century.  Since 
then,  the  European  powers  have  made  discoveries  and  con- 
quests in  this  country.  The  English  East  India  Company 
have  established  a commercial  dynasty  here,  the  effect  of 
which  has  been  to  extend  the  English  policy  and  power 
over  nearly  all  the  East  Indies,  and  to  subject  the  inhabit- 
ants to  an  oppressive  vassalage.  The  English  and  Ameri- 
cans have  established  missionary  stations  here. 

14  * 


162 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  the  Tartars?  Of  their  character? 
What  took  place  in  the  thirteenth  century?  What  soon  after? 
Wbat  is  their  present  state  ? 

What  is  said  of  Afghanistan  ? What  took  place  in  the  fourteenth 
century  ? What  400  years  after  ? What  subsequently  to  that  time  ? 
What  is  its  present  state  ? 

What  is  said  of  Beloochistan ? What  is  their  present  state? 

By  whom  was  Hindoostan  early  invaded  ? What  took  place  in  the 
eleventh  century  ? What  is  said  of  the  East  India  Company  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XXI. 


FARTHER  INDIA. 

The  history  of  this  country  is  nearly  similar  to  that  of 
Hindoostan.  It  has  been  the  scene  of  wars  and  revolu- 
tions ever  since  its  first  discovery.  Here,  empires,  like 
bubbles,  have  risen,  broken,  and  fallen.  It  has  finally 
shared  the  fate  of  Hindoostan,  and  a large  portion  of  it  is 
subjected  to  a British  military  despotism. 


CHINESE  EMPIRE. 

The  early  history  of  this  country  is  shrouded  in  dark- 
ness. It  is,  at  best,  confused  and  fabulous.  The  Chinese 
claim  an  antiquity  almost  as  great  as  the  geologists  claim 
for  the  primitive  earth.  The  rise  of  Confucius  forms  a 
new  era  in  this  empire.  He  flourished  about  2,500  years 
since.  He  was  of  royal  descent,  but  resigned  his  dignity, 
and  betook  himself  to  morals.  He  was  the  Socrates  of  his 
times.  He  enjoined  universal  benevolence,  justice,  virtue, 
and  uprightness.  As  a teacher  of  morality,  he  gave  char- 
acter to  the  nation.  He  made  law  and  authority  to  be 
handmaids  of  morality,  and  parental  government  and  in- 
fluence to  involve  and  shape  every  other  influence.  Hence 


HISTORY. 


63 


originated  the  patriarchal  form  of  government,  which  pre- 
vails in  this  empire.  He  led  a quiet  and  abstemious  life, 
and  was  distinguished  for  wisdom  and  mildness.  Though, 
from  disaffection,  he  had  separated  himself  from  the  court, 
he  did  not  attempt  to  overthrow  the  established  form  of 
government,  but  inculcated  the  duty  of  subordination  to 
power,  and  the  practice  of  all  the  private  and  public  virtues. 

China  has  frequently  been  subdued  by  foreign  conquer- 
ors, and  has  recently  encountered  a struggle  with  Great 
Britain. 

The  Chinese  have  strenuously  avoided  all  intercourse 
with  other  nations,  and  regard  themselves  as  the  “ Celestial 
Empire.” 


JAPAN. 

The  first  knowledge  that  the  Europeans  had  of  this 
country,  was  from  Marco  Polo,  about  600  years  ago. 
About  two  hundred  years  after,  a Portuguese  colony  was 
founded  there,  and  the  celebrated  Xavier,  a Jesuit  mission- 
ary, proceeded  to  Japan,  to  propagate  Christianity.  This 
he  did  with  great  success.  About  40  years  after,  a revo- 
lution broke  out,  and  a new  line  of  kings  began.  The 
Jesuits  and  Portuguese  suffered  much  from  this  new  order 
of  things,  but  they  were  exceedingly  stubborn  and  refrac- 
tory. At  length  the  Portuguese  and  the  missionaries  were 
expelled  from  the  empire.  Multitudes  fell  in  the  contest. 
But,  before  this,  the  Dutch  had  gained  an  influence  with  the 
natives,  and  had  contributed  not  a little  to  the  results  just 
spoken  of.  They  succeeded  the  Portuguese  in  influence 
and  trade,  but  not  in  ecclesiastical  affairs.  The  Japanese 
are  exceedingly  jealous  of  foreigners.  They  are  a some- 
what refined  and  intelligent  people.  Their  government  is 
despotic.  The  Confucian  philosophy  has  prevailed  here 
extensively  ; but  paganism  is  now  the  prevalent  religion. 

QUESTIONS.  With  what  country  does  Farther  India  compare  ? 
Of  what  has  it  been  the  scene  ? What  is  now  its  condition  ? 

What  is  said  of  the  history  of  China  ? What  of  the  antiquity  they 
>laim  ? What  of  Confucius  ? What  did  he  enjoin  ? What  effect 
lad  his  teachings  on  the  Chinese  nation  ? Give  a brief  view  of  his 


164 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


sj'stem.  What  was  his  personal  character?  What  else  is  said  of 
China  ? What  do  they  style  themselves  ? 

How  long  ago  was  Japan  known  to  the  world  ? What  is  said  of 
Xavier  ? What  took  place  about  40  years  after  ? What  befell  the 
Portuguese  and  the  missionaries  ? What  is  said  of  the  influence  of 
the  Dutch  ? What  are  the  feelings  of  the  Japanese  toward  foreign- 
ers ? What  else  is  said  of  them  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XXII. 

AFRICA, 

EGYPT. 


Egypt  is  a land  famed  in  ancient  history.  It  was  once 
the  home  of  the  arts  and  sciences.  Nowhere  on  earth  can 
be  found  so  many  monuments  of  ancient  power  and  splen- 
dor. Her  labyrinths,  catacombs,  pyramids,  and  obelisks, 
artificial  lakes  and  aqueducts,  her  cities  and  temples,  now 
in  ruins,  are  truly  the  wonders  of  the  world. 

The  political  history  of  this  country  begins  with  the 
Pharaohs.  For  more  than  1,000  years  afterward,  this  coun- 
try presents  an  almost  unbroken  series  of  revolutions. 
About  400  years  before  Christ,  it  belonged  to  the  Persian 
empire,  and  afterwards  to  the  Grecian,  till  at  length  it  be- 
came a Roman  province.  In  the  seventh  century,  it 
fell  a prey  to  the  Mahometan  caliphs.  In  the  middle  ages, 
it  became  subject  to  the  Turkish  empire.  About  the  year 
1778,  it  was  conquered  by  the  French,  under  Buonaparte. 

Mohammed  Pacha,  though  nominally  a Turkish  viceroy, 
exercises  absolute  power  over  this  country.  He  is  an  en- 
terprising, ingenious,  and  powerful  prince. 


HISTORY. 


165 


BARBARY  STATES. 

These  states  occupy  a conspicuous  place  in  ancient  and 
modern  history.  Ancient  Carthage  and  Numidia  were  in- 
cluded in  this  territory.  These  states  are  inhabited  by  a 
fierce  and  warlike  people,  of  the  Saracenic  race.  They 
have  been  several  times  subjugated  by  foreign  powers. 
During  the  last  century,  they  threw  off  the  Turkish  yoke,  to 
which  they  had  turbulently  submitted,  and'  erected  them- 
selves into  independent  governments.  They  have  since 
formed  a line  of  piratical  powers,  to  the  great  annoyance 
of  most  of  the  commercial  nations.  Their  power  has  since 
been  broken  by  the  United  States,  by  England,  and  by 
France. 


NUBIA. 


Nubia  was  anciently  called  Ethiopia.  It  was  then  a civil- 
ized and  powerful  people.  Ethiopia  gave  arts,  learning,  and 
laws,  to  the  Egyptians.  They  are  black,  but  not  of  the 
Negro  race.  Neither  the  Persians,  Romans,  Saracens,  nor 
T urks,  could  conquer  them  in  their  ancient  glory.  But 
their  splendor  and  power  are  now  gone.  The  country  is 
broken  up  into  weak  and  petty  states,  and  governed  by  rival 
and  tyrannical  chiefs. 


ABYSSINIA. 


Little  was  known  of  this  country  till  the  fourth  century, 
when  it  was  converted  to  Christianity.  About  1,000  years 
afterward,  the  Portuguese  waged  war  upon  the  Abyssinians, 
in  order  to  introduce  among  them  the  Catholic  faith.  They, 
however,  failed,  and  the  Abyssinians  have  always  since  been 
jealous  of  Europeans,  and  they  are  now  sunk  into  a semi- 
barbaric  state. 

QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  Egypt  ? Of  what  was  it  once 
the  seat  ? With  what  does  Egypt  abound  ? What  is  said  of  the 
Pharaohs  ? What  took  place  during  the  thousand  years  subse- 
quent ? What  changes  afterward  ? What  took  place  in  the  seventh 


166 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


century  ? What  in  the  middle  ages  ? What  since  ? What  else  is 
said  of  Mohammed  Pacha  ? 

What  is  said  of  the  Barbary  States?  By  whom  are  they  inhabit- 
ed ? Have  they  ever  been  conquered  ? What  took  place  during  the 
last  century  ? What  is  said  of  them  since  ? By  what  nations  has 
their  power  been  broken  ? 

What  was  Nubia  anciently  called?  What  is  said  of  Ethiopia? 
What  is  said  of  their  complexion  ? Were  they  conquered  anciently  ? 
What  is  said  of  them  now  ? 

What  is  said  of  Abyssinia?  What  afterward  took  place?  What 
is  said  of  the  Abyssinians  since  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XXIII. 

EASTERN  AFRICA. 


Of  the  history  of  this  vast  region  very  little  is  known. 
Some  trade  is  carried  on  with  the  Europeans.  They  often 
go  naked.  They  believe  in  charms  and  divinations  — are 
ignorant  and  stupid. 


SOUTHERN  AFRICA. 


This  region  was  visited  by  European  adventurers  a few 
centuries  since,  and  colonies  were  established  here.  The 
Caffres  and  Hottentots  inhabit  the  most  of  this  country. 
Some  of  the  tribes  seem  to  be  raised  but  a grade  above  the 
brute  species,  living  in  caves,  or  in  the  open  air,  sleeping 
often  in  the  trees,  and  living  upon  grass,  roots,  toads,  and 
insects.  In  other  parts,  they  live  more  like  human  beings 
— have  the  semblance  of  huts  or  tents,  and  show  a little 
more  enterprise. 

Missionary  efforts  here  have  proved  successful,  and  show 
the  wonderful  power  of  the  gospel  to  elevate  the  mind  and 
purify  the  heart. 


HISTORY. 


167 


WESTERN  AFRICA. 

This  vast  circuit  of  country  is  a moral  wilderness.  It  is 
the  theatre  of  the  foreign  slave  trade.  The  natives  of 
this  country  have  been  seized  and  carried  to  almost  all 
civilized  countries.  This  has  been  a matter  of  legalized 
commerce ; but  it  is  now  forbidden  by  most  of  the  govern- 
ments that  have  hitherto  participated  in  it.  Little  was 
known  of  this  country  till  recently.  One  impediment  to 
gaining  a knowledge  of  it  is  the  sickliness  of  the  climate. 


CENTRAL  AFRICA. 

This  region  is  settled  by  the  Moors,  or  Negroes  of  an 
Arabic  mixture.  They  are  a timid  and  inoffensive  people. 

What  has  been  said  of  Western  Africa  is  true,  substan- 
tially, of  them.  Some  advancement  has  been  made  in  the 
arts  and  civilization.  The  land  is  very  much  neglected. 

In  truth,  Africa  is  an  ill-fated  country.  It  is  situated 
mostly  in  the  torrid  zone.  It  is  subjected  to  many  unfavor- 
able physical  influences ; among  which  are,  a scorching 
sun  and  a pestilential  atmosphere,  rendered  so  in  part  by 
the  deserts  and  swamps  with  which  the  interior  abounds. 
These  circumstances  have  conspired,  with  others,  to  debili- 
tate, and  actually  deform,  the  mental  and  physical  constitu- 
tion of  the  inhabitants. 

The  condition  and  complexion  of  the  African  people 
have  tempted  other  nations  to  commit  upon  them  cruelties 
and  outrages  which  have  hardly  a parallel  in  the  annals  of 
human  cruelty. 

The  attention  of  the  world,  however,  has  been  called,  of 
late,  to  the  condition  of  the  African  race.  The  slave  trade 
is  now  legalized  only  by  a few  of  the  enlightened  nations  of 
the  world  ; and  a sympathy,  corresponding  somewhat  with 
the  spirit  of  the  Christian  religion,  is  beginning  to  be  felt 
for  the  African. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  Eastern  Africa  ? What  of  their 
trade,  their  superstitions,  and  character  ? 


168 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


What  is  said  of  Southern  Africa  ? Who  inhabit  this  region 
What  is  said  of  them  and  their  habits?  What  is  said  of  the  mis 
sionary  efforts  here  ? 

What  is  said  of  Western  Africa  ? Of  what  is  it  the  theatre  ? 
What  is  said  of  the  slave  trade  ? Was  much  known  of  this  country 
till  recently  ? What  impediment  to  discoveries  in  this  country  ? 

By  whom  is  Central  Africa  settled  ? What  is  said  of  them  ? What 
is  said  of  Africa  in  general ? To  what  is  it  subject  ? What  have 
these  circumstances  led  to  ? What  have  the  Africans  suffered  in 
consequence  ? What  is  now  beginning  to  be  the  state  of  public 
feeling  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


A BRIEF  HISTORICAL  AND  STATISTICAL  VIEW 

OF 

THE  DIFFERENT  MISSIONS  AND  MISSIONARY  STATIONS 

OF 

THE  SEVERAL  RELIGIOUS  DENOMINATIONS. 


LESSON  XXIV. 


The  missionary  enterprise  is  peculiar  to  the  gospel  dis- 
pensation. There  was  nothing  essentially  like  it  under  the 
old  dispensation.  The  progress  of  religion,  anciently,  was 
like  that  of  a stream,  confined  close  within  its  rock-bound 
banks.  In  the  latter  dispensation,  it  is  like  the  same 
stream,  swelling  beyond  its  bounds,  and  fertilizing  a world. 

Jesus  Christ  was  in  the  highest  sense  of  the  word  a 
Missionary.  He  was  sent  of  the  Father  to  a lost  world; 
and  he  died  a sacrifice  for  sin,  and  a martyr  to  his  cause, 
upon  the  great  field  to  which  he  was  sent. 


MISSIONS. 


169 


His  early  disciples  and  apostles  were  missionaries.  “ Go 
ye  into  all  the  world,  and  preach  the  gospel  to  every  crea- 
ture,” was  the  Savior’s  command  and  their  instructions ; 
“ and  they  went  every  where  preaching  the  word.” 

The  early  Christians  were  missionaries.  The  action  of 
the  church,  for  the  few  first  centuries,  was  a missionary  action. 
The  gospel  was  preached  to  most  of  the  heathen  nations  then 
on  the  globe ; but  it  was  not  till  since  the  dark  ages  of  the 
church,  that  missionary  operations  took  a systematic  form. 

The  first  Protestant  mission  was  undertaken  about  300 
years  ago.  Gustavus  Vasa,  of  Sweden,  when  he  had  de- 
livered his  own  country  from  the  Danish  yoke,  and  had  es- 
tablished the  religion  of  the  reformation  among  his  subjects, 
sent  a missionary  to  Lapland. 

About  100  years  after  this,  John  Eliot  commenced  a 
mission  among  the  American  Indians  in  Massachusetts. 
This  movement  gave  rise  to  systematic  operations  to  spread 
the  gospel  among  the  native  tribes. 

Early  in  the  last  century,  the  Danes  established  a mission 
in  Hindoostan.  Its  influence  has  been  extensive  and  happy. 
About  20  years  afterward,  a mission  was  established  at 
Madras,  and,  as  a consequence,  nearly  1,500  converts 
united  with  the  church. 

The  Moravians  next  appear  upon  the  scene  of  mission- 
ary enterprise.  They  have  had  stations  in  the  West 
Indies,  in  Greenland,  among  the  North  American  Indians, 
in  South  America,  Labrador,  and  in  South  Africa. 

Their  operations  have  been  very  successful.  The  Mo- 
ravians are  emphatically  a missionary  people.  Their  reli- 
gion has  taken  that  cast ; and  the  zeal  with  which  they  have 
prosecuted  their  operations  is  worthy  of  all  praise. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  the  missionary  enterprise  ? What 
was  Jesus  Christ?  What  were  his  disciples  and  apostles  ? 

What  is  said  of  the  church  during  the  first  centuries  ? Who  es- 
tablished the  first  Protestant  mission  ? Mention  the  facts.  What 
took  place  100  years  afterward  ? To  what  did  this  give  rise  ? What 
took  place  early  last  century  ? What  is  said  of  the  mission  at  Ma- 
dras ? Where  are  the  Moravian  missionary  stations  ? What  is  said 
of  their  operations  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 

15 


170 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


LESSON  XXV. 


BRITISH  MISSIONS. 


CONGREGATIONAL  MISSIONS. 

The  London  Missionary  Society  was  established  in  the 
latter  part  of  the  last  century.  They  have  established  mis- 
sions in  the  South  Sea  islands,  Hindoostan,  Birmah,  Caf- 
fraria,  among  the  Hottentots,  in  the  West  Indies,  in  South 
America,  in  New  Holland,  and  in  the  Mediterranean. 
These  missions  have  been,  from  time  to  time,  most  signally 
blessed,  especially  those  in  the  Pacific,  and  in  the  East 
Indies. 

THE  ENGLISH  BAPTIST  MISSIONARY  SOCIETY. 


This  society  has  establishments  in  Bengal,  Arracan, 
Hindoostan,  in  Ceylon,  Java,  Sumatra,  the  West  Indies,  in 
South  America,  and  in  South  Africa.  The  missions  at 
Bengal,  in  Hindoostan,  and  in  the  West  Indies,  have  been 
greatly  blessed. 

THE  ENGLISH  EPISCOPAL  MISSIONS. 

The  Church  of  England  Missionary  Society  was  formed 
about  the  commencement  of  the  present  century.  They 
have  stations  in  New  Zealand,  Hindoostan,  Bombay,  Cey- 
lon, North  America,  Abyssinia,  Sierra  Leone,  and  the 
West  Indies.  These  missions  have  been  blessed,  especially 
the  one  at  Sierra  Leone,  in  Africa. 


ENGLISH  METHODIST  MISSIONS 


The  Wesleyan  Missionary  Society  was  formed  in  1817. 
The  English  Methodists  had  previously  exerted  great 


MISSIONS. 


171 


influence  in  spreading  the  gospel  in  America  and  else- 
where. 

This  society  has  missions  in  the  West  Indies,  in  Brit- 
ish America  nearly  eighty  different  stations,  several  in  Asia 
and  Ceylon,  about  thirty  in  Africa,  and  in  different  parts  of 
Europe  about  forty.  These  operations  have  been  greatly 
blessed. 


QUESTIONS.  When  was  the  London  Missionary  Society  es- 
tablished ? Where  have  they  missions  ? What  is  said  of  their  suc- 
cess ? What  establishments  have  the  English  Baptists  ? What  is 
said  of  their  success  ? When  was  the  Church  of  England  Mission- 
ary Society  established?  Where  have  they  stations?  What  soci- 
ety was  formed  in  1817  ? What  is  said  of  them  ? Where  have  they 
missions  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XXVI. 

AMERICAN  MISSIONS. 

THE  AMERICAN  BOARD  OF  COMMISSIONERS  FOR 
FOREIGN  MISSIONS. 

^his  board  was  formed  in  1810.  Application  had  pre- 
viously been  made  to  a body  of  Congregational  clergymen, 
by  a few  devoted  individuals,  who  were  in  a course  of  prep- 
aration for  the  ministry,  for  assistance  to  enable  them  to 
prosecute  their  purpose  to  spend  their  lives  among  the 
heathen.  This  led  to  the  formation  of  the  board.  It  has 
four  stations  in  Africa,  two  in  Greece,  six  in  Turkey,  four 
in  Syria,  two  in  Persia,  four  among  the  Mahrattas,  seven 
in  Southern  India,  seven  in  Ceylon,  two  in  Siam,  one  in 
China,  one  at  Singapore,  three  in  Borneo,  seventeen  at  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  and  twenty-five  among  the  American 
Indians.  Some  of  these  missions  have  been  greatly  blessed, 
especially  those  at  Ceylon  and  the  Sandwich  Islands. 


172 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


PRESBYTERIAN  MISSIONS. 


The  Presbyterian  Board  of  Foreign  Missions.  This 
board  is  the  channel  of  missionary  operations  for  a large 
portion  of  the  Presbyterian  church  in  the  United  States. 

It  has  establishments  in  West  Africa,  the  East  Indies, 
and  among  the  North  American  Indians.  It  has  one  sta- 
tion  at  Singapore,  and  several  at  Texas. 


AMERICAN  BAPTIST  MISSIONS. 


'Flie  American  Baptist  Board  of  Foreign  Missions  grew 
out  of  the  American  Board  of  Missions.  This  Board  was 
formed  through  the  influence,  in  part,  of  the  Rev.  A.  Jud- 
son,  one  of  the  first  missionaries  of  . the  American  Board, 
after  having  changed  his  opinions  in  respect  to  baptism. 

The  Board  has  sixteen  stations  in  Europe,  two  in  Africa, 
(Liberia,)  seventeen  among  the  American  Indians,  thirty- 
seven  in  Asia.  Birmah  is  the  seat  of  their  operations  in 
Asia. 

The  operations  of  this  society,  on  the  whole,  have  been 
very  successful. 

AMERICAN  METHODIST  MISSIONS. 

The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  Missionary  Society 
was  organized  in  1819.  They  have  establishments  in 
Africa,  South  America,  and  in  Texas.  This  society  has. 
several  stations  among  the  American  Indians. 


THE  FREE-WILL  BAPTIST  MISSIONS. 


This  denomination  have  not  till  recently  taken  the  for- 
eign missionary  field.  They  have  one  station  at  Orissa. 

QUESTIONS.  Mention  the  circumstances  that  led  to  the  forma- 
tion of  the  American  Board.  When  was  it  formed  5 Where  have 


MISSIONS. 


173 


they  stations?  What  is  said  of  their  success?  What  is  said  of  the 
Presbyterian  Board  ? Out  of  what  did  the  American  Baptist  Board 
grow?  Mention  the  circumstances.  Where  have  they  stations'1 
With  what  success  have  they  met?  What  is  said  of  the  Methodist 
Episcopal  mission  ? Where  was  this  society  formed  ? Where  have 
they  operations  ? Where  is  the  Free-will  Baptist  missionary 
station  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


LESSON  XXVII. 
CATHOLIC  MISSIONS. 


It  has  been  remarked  that  the  Roman  Catholics,  from 
the  very  first,  have  propagated  their  faith  by  missionary 
operations.  In  prosecuting  their  grand  design  of  convert- 
ing the  world  to  their  religious  views,  they  have,  from  time 
to  time,  exhibited  a zeal  that  has  had  no  parallel  in  the 
history  of  missions.  Almost  all  of  South  America,  by 
these  operations,  has  been  converted  to  their  faith;  and 
their  influence  has  extended  widely  over  North  America. 
They  have  spread  their  faith  throughout  a large  proportion 
of  the  countries  of  Europe,  and  are  making  the  most 
strenuous  exertions  to  propagate  their  religion  in  the  East 
Indies  and  in  Central  Asia.  They  have  recently  made 
vigorous  efforts  to  establish  missions  in  the  islands  of  the 
Pacific  Ocean. 

The  Jesuits  hold  the  political  and  moral  influence  of 
the  Papal  hierarchy,  and  are  the  missionaries  and  mission- 
ary patrons  of  this  vast  establishment. 

The  funds  of  the  Catholic  missionary  establishments 
are  derived  mostly  from  France,  Italy,  Austria,  and  Great 
Britain. 


15* 


174 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


OTHER  MISSIONARY  OPERATIONS. 

The  German  Missionary  Society  has  stations  in  Siberia 
and  in  Liberia,  and  several  in  HindoOstan. 

The  French  Protestant  Missionary  Society  was  formed 
in  1822.  They  have  several  stations  in  South  Africa. 

The  Presbyterian  Assembly  of  Scotland  has  stations  at 
Calcutta,  Bombay,  Madras,  and  in  other  places. 

The  Scottish  Episcopal  Missionary  Society  has  mission- 
ary establishments  in  the  West  Indies,  and  in  various  parts 
of  Asia. 

The  Glasgow  Missionary  Society  was  formed  in  1796. 
It  has  missionary  stations  at  South  Africa,  among  the 
Calfres. 

The  Netherland  Missionary  Society  has  establishments 
in  the  East  Indies  and  in  Siam. 

The  Rhenish  Missionary  Society  has  several  missionary 
stations  in  South  Africa. 

The  Jewish  Missionary  Society  was  formed  in  1808.  It 
has  over  fifty  missionaries  and  assistants,  employed  in  vari- 
ous parts  of  Europe  and  Asia. 


QUESTIONS.  What  is  said  of  Catholic  missions  ? Where  have 
they  operations  ? 

What  is  said  of  the  Jesuits  ? Whence  do  the  Catholics  derive  their 
funds  to  carry  on  their  operations  ? 

Where  has  the  German  Missionary  Society  establishments  ? 

When  was  the  French  Missionary  Society  formed,  and  where  have 
they  stations  ? 

Where  has  the  Presbyterian  Assembly  of  Scotland  missionary 
operations?  Where  the  Scottish  Episcopal  Missionary  Society? 
Where  the  Glasgow  Missionary  Society  ? 

Where  the  Netherland  Missionary  Society  ? The  Rhenish  Mis- 
sionary Society  ? The  Jewish  Missionary  Society  ? 

Review  the  three  preceding  lessons. 


STATISTICS. 


1 71 


TABULAR  VIEW  OF  MISSIONS. 


Missionary  Societies. 

Stations. 

Mission- 

aries. 

Communi- 

cants. 

Moravian, 

52 

241 

16,390 

London,  

562 

158 

7,100 

English  Baptist, 

132 

140 

23,200 

Church  of  England,  ..... 

92 

183 

2,947 

Wesleyan  Methodist,  (Eng.)  . . 

219 

643 

72,690 

American  Board, 

85 

526 

21,261 

Presbyterian  Board, 

12 

32 

Unk’n. 

American  Methodist, 

50 

100 

3,510 

American  Baptist,  ...... 

67 

112 

2,100 

Free-will  Baptist,  

1 

3 

Unk’n. 

German, 

4 

12 

(C 

French,  

8 

13 

117 

Scottish, 

5 

7 

1,196 

Glasgow, 

3 

4 

Unk’n. 

Netherland, 

13 

19 

<( 

Jewish, 

23 

50 

it 

Note.  In  the  above  table,  the  wives  of  missionaries,  and  also  as- 
sistants, are  in  some  cases  included. 


POPULATION  OF  THE  DIFFERENT  NATIONS  AND 
COUNTRIES  ON  THE  GLOBE,  AND  THE  SQUARE 
MILES  THEY  CONTAIN. 


America, 

North  America, 

Population. 

44,000,000 

29,500,000 

17,000,000 

United  States, 

Maine, 

502,000 

New  Hampshire, 

285,000 

Vermont, 

Massachusetts, 

293,000 

738,000 

Rhode  Island, 

109,000 

Connecticut, 

310,000 

Square  Miles. 

15,000,000 

8,500,000 

2,000,000 

35,000 

9,500 

8,000 

7,750 

1,250 

4,760 


176 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


New  York, 

Papulation. 

2,429,000 

Square  Mike. 

46,000 

New  Jersey, 

373,000 

7,800 

Pennsylvania, 

1,724,000 

78,000 

47,000 

Delaware, 

2,100 

Maryland, 

469,000 

10,000 

District  of  Columbia, 

44,000 

100 

Virginia, 

1,240,000 

68,000 

North  Carolina, 

753,000 

50,000 

South  Carolina, 

594,000 

32,000 

Georgia, 

691,000 

61,000 

Alabama, 

591,000 

52,000 

Mississippi, 

376,000 

48,000 

Louisiana, 

352,000 

49,000 

Tennessee, 

829,000 

45,000 

Kentucky, 

780,000 

40.000 

45.000 

Ohio, 

Michigan, 

1,519,000 

212,000 

63,000 

Indiana, 

686,000 

35,000 

Illinois, 

476,000 

55,000 

Missouri, 

384,000 

63,000 

Arkansas, 

98,000 

54,000 

British  America, 

2,000,000 

2,500,000 

Canada, 

885,000 

230,000 

New  Brunswick, 

119,000 

30,000 

Nova  Scotia, 

120,000 

14,000 

Newfoundland, 

80,000 

30,000 

Texas, 

200,000 

333,000 

Mexico, 

8,000,000 

1,250,000 

Guatimala, 

2,000,000 

200,000 

West  Indies, 

3,000,000 

100,000 

South  America, 

14,200,000 

6,500,000 

New  Grenada, 

1,660,000 

400,000 

V enezuela, 

1,000,000 

400,000 

Equador, 

660,000 

250,000 

Guiana, 

194,000 

160,000 

Brazil, 

5,000,000 

3,000,000 

Peru, 

1,500,000 

500,000 

Bolivia, 

1,250,000 

400,000 

United  Province®, 

1,000,000 

250,000 

1,000,000 

Paraguay, 

84,000 

Chili, 

1,400,000 

200,000 

Europe, 

230,000,000 

3,500,000 

Spain, 

14,000,000 

170,000 

STATISTICS. 


177 


Portugal, 

Population. 

3,500,000 

Square  Allies 

40,000 

Italy, 

20,000,000 

120,000 

Greece, 

600,000 

20,000 

Turkey, 

9,000,000 

200,000 

Austria, 

32,000,000 

250,000 

Switzerland, 

2,000,000 

15,000 

Germany, 

14,000,000 

71,000 

Prussia, 

12,500,000 

110,000 

France, 

32,000,000 

200,000 

Belgium, 

4,000,000 

13,000 

Holland, 

2,750,000 

12,000 

Denmark, 

2,000,000 

20,000 

England, 

14,000,000 

42,000 

Wales, 

800,000 

8,000 

Ireland, 

7,750,000 

31.000 

30.000 

Scotland, 

2,250,000 

Norway, 

1,000,000 

120,000 

Sweden, 

3,750,000 

170,000 

Russia, 

52,000,000 

2,000,000 

Asia, 

420,000,000 

16,000,000 

Turkey, 

9,000,000 

500,000 

Arabia, 

12,000,000 

1,000,000 

Persia, 

10,000,000 

500,000 

Afghanistan, 

13,000,000 

330,000 

Beloochistan, 

2,000,000 

170,000 

Herat, 

1,500,000 

170,000 

Hindoostan, 

140,000,000 

1,400,000 

Farther  India, 

30,000,000 

750,000 

Chinese  Empire, 

242,000,000 

5,000,000 

China  Proper, 

146,250,000 

1,250,000 

Thibet, 

12,000,000 

400,000 

Tartary, 

6,000,000 

2,000,000 

Japan, 

25,000,000 

250,000 

Independent  Tartary 

7,000,000 

750,000 

Siberia, 

7,000,000 

4,750,000 

Africa, 

90,000,000 

11,000,000 

Egypt, 

3,000,000 

200,000 

Tripoli, 

910,000 

190,000 

Tunis, 

1,750,000 

55,000 

Algiers, 

1,500,000 

91,000 

Morocco, 

3,000,000 

1,500,000 

100,000 

Fez, 

Nubia, 

70,000 

500,000 

325,000 

Abyssinia, 

3,500,000 

300,000 

178 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


Liberia, 

Sierra  Leone, 
Guinea, 


Population. 

25.000 

13.000 

5,000,000 


Square  Miles. 

20,000 

5,000 

4,000,000 


The  population  of  most  of  Africa  has  not  yet  been  ascertained. 


Oceanica, 

Malaysia, 

Australasia, 

Polynesia, 


20,000,000 

17,000,000 

2,500,000 

750,000 


4,000,000 

3,500,000 

3,500,000 

200,000 


EXTENT  OF  THE  SEVERAL 

OCEANS  AND  SEAS 

OCEANS. 

Oceans. 

Square  Miles. 

Pacific,  .... 

. 50,000,000 

Southern, .... 

30,000,000 

Atlantic,  .... 

. 25,000,000 

Indian,  .... 

17,000,000 

Arctic,  .... 

. 1,000,000 

SEAS. 

Seas. 

Square  Miles. 

Chipese,  .... 

. 1,000,000 

Caribbean, 

800,000 

Mediterranean, 

600,000 

Okotsk,  .... 

500,000 

Celebes,  . 

206,000 

Corea,  . . • . 

206,000 

Black,  . 

195,000 

North,  .... 

159,000 

Caspian,  .... 

120,000 

Red,  ..... 

98,000 

Baltic, 

90,000 

White,  .... 

35,000 

Marmora,  .... 

6,000 

Irish, 

5,000 

RAILROADS, 


179 


Some  of  the 

ISHED,  OR 


principal  Railroads,  finished,  unfin- 

CHARTERED,  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Names. 


Places  united. 


Miles 

long. 


States. 


Bangor  and  Oldtown, 

Eastern, 

Boston  and  Concord, 

Boston  and  Providence, 

Boston  and  Worcester, 

Western, 

Providence  and  Stonington, 
Norwich  and  Worcester, 
Hartford  and  New  Haven, 
Housatonic, 

Long  Island, 

Utica  and  Schenectady, 
Mohawk, 

Saratoga  and  Schenectady, 

Troy  and  Ballston, 

Utica  and  Syracuse, 

Auburn  and  Syracuse, 

Lockport  and  Niagara, 

Buffalo  and  Niagara, 

Ithaca  and  Oswego, 

Rochester  and  Batavia, 

New  York  and  Erie, 

Paterson, 

Camden  and  Amboy, 

Jersey  City  and  Trenton, 
Philadelphia  and  Trenton, 
Philadelphia  and  Columbia, 
Philadelphia  and  Reading, 
Philadelphia  and  Baltimore, 
Columbia  and  Gettysburg, 
Danville  and  Pottsville, 

Mauch  Chunk  and  Port  Carbon, 
Johnstown  and  Hollidaysburg, 
Lancaster  and  Harrisburg, 
Baltimore  and  Susquehawnah, 
Williamsport  and  Elmyra, 
Carbcndale  and  Honesdale, 
Cumberland  Valley, 

New  Castle  and  Frenchtown, 
Baltimore  and  Ohio, 

Baltimore  and  Washington, 
Winchester, 

Richmond  and  Petersburg, 
Richmond  and  Potomac, 
Petersburg  and  Roanoke, 
Portsmouth  and  Roanoke, 
Raleigh  and  Gaston, 

Gaston  and  Belfield, 

Wilmington  and  Raleigh, 
Charleston, 

Central, 

Tuscumbia  and  Decatur, 
Montgomery  and  Chattahoochee, 
Vicksburg, 

Jackson  and  Brandon, 

Grand  Gulf  and  Port  Gibson, 
New  Orleans  and  Nashville, 
West  Feliciana, 

Memphis  and  La  Grange, 
Tallahasse, 

Lexington  and  Ohio, 

Central, 

Detroit  and  Pontiac, 

Erie  and  Kalamazoo, 

Madison  and  Lafayette, 


Bangor  and  Oldtown, 

Boston  and  Portland, 

Boston  and  Concord, 

Boston  and  Providence, 

Boston  and  Worcester, 

Worcester  and  Albany, 

Providence  and  Stonington, 

Norwich  and  Worcester, 

Hartford  and  New  Haven, 

Bridgeport  and  New  Milford, 

Brooklyn  and  Greenport, 

Utica  and  Scheuectady, 

Albany  and  Schenectady, 

Saratoga  and  Schenectady , 

Troy  and  Ballston, 

Utica  and  Syracuse, 

Auburn  and  Syracuse, 

Lockport  and  Niagara  Falls, 

Buffalo  and  Niagara  Falls, 

Ithaca  and  Oswego, 

Rochester  and  Batavia, 

Hudson  River  and  Lake  Erie, 

Jersey  City  and  Paterson, 

Camden  and  Amboy, 

Jersey  City  and  Trenton, 

Philadelphia  and  Trenton, 

Philadelphia  and  Columbia, 
Philadelphia  and  Reading, 

Philadelphia  and  Baltimore, 

Columbia  and  Gettysburg, 

Danville  and  Pottsville, 

Mauch  Chunk  and  Port  Carbon, 
Johnstown  and  Hollidaysburg, 
Lancaster  and  Harrisburg, 

Baltimore  and  Susquehannah  River, 
Williamsport  and  Elmyra, 

Carbondale  and  Honesdale, 
Chambersburg  and  Harrisburg, 

New  Castle  aud  Frenchtown, 

Baltimore  and  Ohio  River, 

Baltimore  and  Washington, 

Winchester  and  Harper’s  Ferry, 
Richmond  and  Petersburg, 

Richmond  and  Potomac  River, 
Petersburg  and  Blakeley, 

Portsmouth  and  Roanoke  River, 
Raleigh  and  Gaston, 

Gaston  and  Belfield, 

Wilmington  and  Halifax, 

Charleston  and  Augusta, 

Savannah  and  Macon, 

Tuscumbia  and  Decatur, 

Montgomery  and  Chattahoochee  River, 
Vicksburg  and  Jackson, 

Jackson  and  Brandon, 

Grand  Gulf  and  Port  Gibson, 

New  Orleans  and  Nashville, 

St.  Francisville  and  Woodville, 
Memphis  and  La  Grange, 

Tallahasse  and  St.  Marks, 

Lexington  and  Louisville, 

Detroit  and  Lake  Michigan, 

Detroit  and  Pontiac, 

Toledo  and  Adrian, 

Madisou  and  Lafayette, 


13 
110 

75 

42 

43 
147 

46 
58 
35 
35 
98 

50 
16 
20 

25 
63 
22 
22 
20 

29 

47 

17 

51 

58 

26 
81 
58 
98 
40 

44 

35 

36 
35 

76 
70 
16 
50 
16 

329 

38 

30 
21 
75 
60 
80 
90 
20 

160 

136 

200 

46 

85 

45 

14 
7 

564 

27 

50 

20 

85 

175 

25 

33 

155 


Maine. 

Mass,  and  Maine. 
Mass,  and  N.  H. 
Mass,  and  R.  I. 
Massachusetts. 
Mass,  and  N.  Y. 

R.  I.  and  Conn. 
Conn,  and  Mass. 
Connecticut. 

do. 

New  York, 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 
do. 

New  Jersey, 
do. 
do. 

Penn,  and  N.  Y. 
Pennsylvania, 
do. 

Penn,  and  Md. 
Pennsylvania. 

do. 

do. 

do. 

Md.  and  Penn. 
Penn,  and  N.  Y. 
Pennsylvania, 
do. 

Delaware. 

Md.  and  Va. 

Md.  and  D.  C. 
Virginia, 
do. 
do. 

Va.  and  N.  C. 
do.  do. 
North  Carolina. 

N.  C.  and  Va. 
North  Carolina. 

S.  C.  and  Georgia. 
Georgia . 

Alabama. 

do. 

Mississippi. 

do. 

do. 

La., Mi.,  and  Tenn. 
La.  and  Miss. 
Tennessee. 

Florida. 

Kentucky. 

Michigan. 

do. 

do. 

Indiana. 


18 


MISCELLANEOUS  VIEW. 


Some  of  the  principal  Canals,  finished  and  unfin- 
ished, in  the  United  States. 


Names. 

•' 

Places  connected. 

Length . 

Stales. 

Cumberland  and  Oxford, 

Portland  and  Lake  Sebago, 

18 

Maine. 

Middlesex, 

Boston  and  Lowell, 

27 

Massachusetts. 

Blackstone, 

Providence  and  Worcester, 

45 

Mass,  and  R.  Isl. 

Farmington, 

New  Haven  and  Northampton, 

78 

Conn,  and  Mass, 

Hudson  and  Delaware 

Honesdale  and  Hudson  River, 

88 

N.  Y.  and  Pern 

Erie, 

Albany  and  Bufl'ulo, 

363 

New  York. 

Champlain, 

Lake  Champlain  and  Hudson  River, 

63 

do. 

Black  River, 

Rome  and  Black  River, 

76 

do. 

Rochester  and  Olean, 

Rochester  and  Olean, 

107 

do. 

Oswego, 

Syracuse  and  Oswego, 

38 

do. 

Chenango, 

Binghampton  ami  Utica, 

37 

do.  ' 

Seneca, 

Seneca  Lake  and  Erie  Canal, 

20 

do. 

Cayuga, 

Geneva  ami  Montezuma, 

20 

do. 

Cliemung, 

Seneca  Lake  and  Elmyra, 

23 

do. 

Ithaca  and  Oswego, 

Ithaca  and  Oswego, 

27 

do. 

Morris, 

Jersey  City  and  Easton,  Pa. 

101 

N.  J.  and  Penn 

Delaware  and  Rariion, 

New  Brunswick  and  Bordcntown, 

42 

New  Jersey. 

Delaware, 

Bristol  and  Eastern, 

60 

Pennsylvania* 

Pittsburg  and  Erie, 

Franklin  and  Erie, 

30 

do. 

Lehigh, 

Easton  and  White  Haven, 

60 

do. 

Schuylkill, 

Philadelphia  and  Port  Carbon, 

108 

do. 

Little  Schuylkill, 

Schuylkill  River  and  Coal  Mines, 

24 

do. 

Union, 

Reading  and  Middletown, 

78 

do. 

Penn.  Railroad  and  Canal, 

Philadelphia  and  Pittsburg, 

335 

do. 

Northumberland, 

Penn.  Canal  to  Northumberland, 

39 

do. 

West  Branch, 

Northumberland  and  Sinnemehouin  R. 

125 

do. 

North  Branch, 

Northumberland  and  Elmyra, 

150 

Penn,  and  N.  Y. 

Beaver, 

Beaver  and  Mercer  City, 

35 

Pennsylvania. 

Sandy  and  Beaver, 

Beaver  and  Bolivar, 

75 

Penn,  and  Ohio. 

Delaware  and  Chesapeake, 

Delaware  and  Chesapeake  Bays, 

14 

Delaware. 

Chesapeake  and  Ohio  R.  R.  & C. 

Georgetown  and  Pittsburg, 

342 

Va.  and  Maryland 

Dismal  Swamp, 

Chesapeake  Bay  and  New  Lebanon, 

23 

Va.  and  N.  Caro* 

Welden, 

Welden  and  Blakely, 

12 

N.  Carolina. 

Santee, 

Santee  anti  Cooper  Rivers, 

22 

S.  Carolina. 

Savannah  and  Ogeechee, 

Savannah  and  Ogeechee  Rivers, 

16 

Georgia. 

Muscle  Shoals, 

Round  Muscle  Shoal, 

37 

Alabama. 

New  Orleans  and  Grand  Lake, 

75 

Louisiana. 

Orleans, 

New  Orleans  and  Lake  Ponchartrain, 

7 

do. 

Miami, 

Cincinnati  and  Maumee, 

265 

Ohio. 

Ohio  State, 

Portsmouth  and  Cleveland, 

309 

do. 

Wabash  and  Erie, 

Lafayette  and  Toledo, 

214 

Indiana  and  Olr-' 

Illinois, 

Peru  and  Chicago, 

100 

Illinois. 

end. 


__ 


< 4 


* 


i 


Date  Due 


' v.irtfi-  ] riot ii..’  q 
■Jir'iB.ilui'  l3<*hou,.  ’j<C  JSfr- 
M.b  .,  mrortt  ArifhrnqtltJ 
A .C.  ,y  Atttui  1 ' 

Boots  tor  thaO  pljPPt 
Mtr.  lOM  of  ItfaYton  I,>  1c  IX Ord. 

. ! ho  Oti»hoo  Gfuedn. 

Brncklyn  Swaii  . 

<Jnttsl5  for  ti.r  , /<>  in'.,.  'upper. 
Tli'V  J.'ew  Bart  it.,  jus. 
Assrinbly’s  Shorter  ♦Jmjm.Su, 
Scripture  i.roois  inseijiM  in  fij] 
fe4.tlt)  poi  hu.idrep, 

Waft's  U • i..  snu.  Jloral'tiy,,  < 
A Mutter's  ft. -4.  titt  ttie 
swrio's  m letters tiy up  affseat  s 
Erotil'I-cuonsorBioritiic.  , 


muE/  Leai)  & 


1 : %)ok®c!U  '.  'Pt.  -iiolieis  and  Importers  of  Foreign  Books 

and  Station  iry.  Port*  and,  Me.,  keep  constantly  on  hand 

' an  cr.teuSyo  tno'ck  of  Theological,  Law,  Medical,  Classi- 

1 ogtl  School,  -inj-euile,  Musical  and  Miscellaneous  Books  : 
I . 

with  agtei  ra'  "sori  nent  of  Stationary,  and  useful  and 

f’uhc)  a tcs,  usually  kept  in  a Bookstore. 


l 'a  >Gree.<-icaf%'  ,u 

mt  , 


Defir  of  Israel — P 
by  Dr.  Pohc!.--  ftl  dclctoa  Letters  from  TV 


cation  by  Dr.  Pand-rEpham’s  Ratio  Discip: 

!’  euborgLnism  Reviewed,  by  Dr.  Pond— Juryman 
--  Mousotmid  Consecration — DR.  PAYSOxN  S 
i ) t iJETE  WORKS,  3 vols.  8 vo.  new  stereotype 

1.  - Memoir  of  William  R.  Prince — Plato  his  Life  amr-t, 

< j . . .<*,« 

|{  ( by  Dr  Pond. 


; • ! . ...  ! 

o'  - L '.kip'.  vvili  supply  thel'r.ide  with  '-their  own  [j 

j!  >.  cLoafion-  <>n  l>..t.r?f  terms  ; and  the  public  'generally  j 
|{  w nit  almost  every  article  of  Books  and  Stationary,  ao  | 


j?  low  as  they  a<  e 


et7S66zi.oa 


sauejqn  Aljsja/vjun  9>lnQ 


